1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
57 \maintain_unincluded_children no
59 \language_package default
62 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
63 \font_sans "default" "default"
64 \font_typewriter "default" "default"
65 \font_math "auto" "auto"
66 \font_default_family default
67 \use_non_tex_fonts false
71 \font_typewriter_osf false
72 \font_sf_scale 100 100
73 \font_tt_scale 100 100
75 \use_dash_ligatures false
77 \default_output_format default
79 \bibtex_command bibtex
80 \index_command makeindex
81 \float_placement class
82 \float_alignment class
86 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
87 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
91 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
92 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
93 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
98 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
99 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
102 \use_package amsmath 1
103 \use_package amssymb 1
104 \use_package cancel 1
106 \use_package mathdots 1
107 \use_package mathtools 1
108 \use_package mhchem 1
109 \use_package stackrel 1
110 \use_package stmaryrd 1
111 \use_package undertilde 1
113 \cite_engine_type default
117 \paperorientation portrait
123 \notefontcolor #0000ff
127 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
132 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
140 \paragraph_separation skip
143 \math_numbering_side default
144 \quotes_style english
148 \paperpagestyle default
150 \tracking_changes true
151 \output_changes false
153 \postpone_fragile_content false
157 \docbook_table_output 0
158 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
159 \author -1402925745 "Günter Milde"
160 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
161 \author -584632292 "Richard Kimberly Heck"
162 \author -563046850 "Jean-Marc LASGOUTTES"
163 \author -131811572 "Yuriy Skalko"
165 \author 5863344 "Enrico Forestieri"
166 \author 244031559 "Yuriy"
167 \author 630872221 "Jean-Pierre Chrétien" jeanpierre.chretien@free.fr
168 \author 1549938239 "Kornel Benko"
169 \author 1675569489 "Stephan Witt"
180 by the \SpecialChar LyX
185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
187 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
188 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
189 Documentation mailing list:
190 \begin_inset CommandInset href
192 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
204 \begin_inset Newline newline
208 \begin_inset Newline newline
212 \change_deleted -131811572 1600339801
214 \change_inserted -131811572 1600339801
218 \begin_inset Note Note
221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
222 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
223 \begin_inset Newline newline
228 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
236 \begin_layout Standard
237 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
238 LatexCommand tableofcontents
245 \begin_layout Chapter
249 \begin_layout Section
250 What is \SpecialChar LyX
254 \begin_layout Standard
256 is a document preparation system.
257 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
258 scripts, publishable books, business
259 letters and proposals,
260 \change_deleted 5863208 1598113909
264 It is unlike most other
265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
272 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
274 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
275 \begin_inset Quotes eld
279 \begin_inset Quotes erd
283 \begin_inset Quotes eld
287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
290 pt type, left justified, 5
291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
300 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
310 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
314 \begin_layout Standard
319 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
320 's philosophy: most importantly,
321 the format of all of the manuals.
322 If you don't read it, you will have a difficult time navigating the manuals.
323 Additionally it provides a high level content description of the other
324 manuals giving the user an idea of where to look for specific information.
327 \begin_layout Section
332 \begin_layout Standard
333 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
334 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
336 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
337 There is of course a work area for editing documents complete with a vertical
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
343 This is not a bug or an oversight, it is intentional.
344 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
346 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
347 only a vertical scrollbar.
350 \begin_layout Standard
351 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
352 The first case is large images.
353 To avoid images being displayed larger than your screen, left click on
354 the image and use the option
365 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
368 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through both.
371 \begin_layout Standard
372 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
373 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
381 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
388 \begin_layout Section
392 \begin_layout Standard
393 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
395 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
397 Just select the manual you want to read from the
404 \begin_layout Section
405 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
407 \begin_inset CommandInset label
409 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
416 \begin_layout Standard
417 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
418 can be configured via the menu
420 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
424 \begin_inset Index idx
427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
436 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
437 packages are available.
438 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
440 Although this configuration was performed when \SpecialChar LyX
441 was installed on your system,
442 you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
443 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
447 \begin_inset space \space{}
450 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
451 classes, which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
453 To force \SpecialChar LyX
454 to re-inspect your system use
456 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
460 \begin_inset Index idx
463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
464 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
470 Then restart \SpecialChar LyX
471 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
474 \begin_layout Section
477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
479 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
486 \begin_layout Standard
487 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
488 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
489 installed but you will not be
491 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122369
492 or print your documents
496 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122520
497 Some \SpecialChar LyX
498 documents use DocBook instead of \SpecialChar LaTeX
500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
507 which can produce PDFs and the like.
510 Even without \SpecialChar LaTeX
512 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122546
515 every \SpecialChar LyX
516 document can still be output as plain text
517 \change_inserted 5863208 1598122500
523 \begin_layout Standard
524 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
526 \change_deleted 5863208 1598122571
530 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
531 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
534 \begin_layout Standard
535 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
536 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
537 finds on your system are listed in a file you can view
540 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
548 If you are missing needed packages then you must install them and then
549 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
552 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
556 \begin_inset Index idx
559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
560 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
568 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
575 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
579 \begin_layout Chapter
580 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
584 \begin_layout Section
585 Basic File Operations
586 \begin_inset Index idx
589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
598 \begin_layout Standard
603 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations common to any word
604 processor as well as some more advanced operations:
607 \begin_layout Itemize
629 \begin_layout Itemize
645 arg "dialog-show lyxfiles templates"
651 \begin_layout Itemize
673 \begin_layout Itemize
681 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352530
685 \begin_layout Itemize
687 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352546
699 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353355
715 \begin_layout Itemize
717 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353357
725 \begin_layout Itemize
747 \begin_layout Itemize
759 arg "buffer-write-as"
763 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352570
767 \begin_layout Itemize
769 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352997
781 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202805
785 \begin_layout Itemize
787 \change_inserted 630872221 1620202811
795 \begin_layout Itemize
809 \begin_layout Itemize
823 \begin_layout Standard
824 They all do pretty much the same thing as other word processors, with a
825 few minor differences.
828 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
839 command lists the available templates.
840 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features
841 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353491
842 and possibly propose text fragments
844 for the document, features
845 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353500
848 you would otherwise need to
849 \change_deleted -712698321 1553353510
851 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353510
855 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353505
859 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
867 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
873 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353657
874 You can also add your own templates to this list by means of storing a
878 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
886 \begin_layout Standard
887 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
919 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
920 to open a file or create a new one, that big
921 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174669
925 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174681
929 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174691
940 \begin_layout Standard
962 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174707
964 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174708
967 people work on the same document at the same time.
971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
972 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
975 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174722
980 \change_deleted 5863208 1598174782
981 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
983 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
985 \begin_inset Flex Emph
988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
990 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
991 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
1000 \begin_inset Flex Emph
1003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1005 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174763
1013 help manual\SpecialChar endofsentence
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1033 will reload the document from disk.
1034 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
1035 and want to restore it to the last save
1036 \change_inserted 5863208 1598174796
1043 \begin_inset space ~
1048 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
1049 them as your changes.
1052 \begin_layout Section
1053 Basic Editing Features
1054 \begin_inset Index idx
1057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1066 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
1073 \begin_layout Standard
1074 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
1075 can perform cut and paste operations
1076 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
1077 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
1078 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
1079 editing features and how to access
1081 We will start with cut and paste.
1084 \begin_layout Standard
1085 As you might expect, the
1089 menu and the standard toolbar have the cut and paste commands, along with
1090 various other editing features.
1091 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
1095 \begin_layout Itemize
1101 \begin_inset Index idx
1104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1133 \begin_layout Itemize
1139 \begin_inset Index idx
1142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1171 \begin_layout Itemize
1177 \begin_inset Index idx
1180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1205 \begin_layout Itemize
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1215 \begin_layout Itemize
1219 \begin_inset space ~
1225 \begin_layout Itemize
1229 \begin_inset space ~
1233 \begin_inset space ~
1239 \begin_inset Index idx
1242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1251 \begin_inset Index idx
1254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1269 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1279 arg "dialog-toggle findreplace"
1285 \begin_layout Standard
1286 The first three are self-explanatory.
1287 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1288 and other programs using
1309 put two versions of text into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted)
1310 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1315 supports formatted and unformatted text as well as graphics.
1316 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1317 For example if the clipboard contains text in a Comma Separated Values
1318 (CSV) format and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1319 into individual cells.
1323 \begin_inset space ~
1328 shows you a list of the last several strings you have pasted.
1329 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1333 \begin_layout Standard
1337 \begin_inset space ~
1342 may also contain optional items for specific formats depending on the clipboard
1344 Possible formats include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1346 \begin_inset space ~
1353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1359 , PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1360 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1361 in different formats and you want to select one format explicitly.
1363 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1367 \begin_inset space \space{}
1370 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1371 text which is often meaningless.)
1374 \begin_layout Standard
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1381 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1383 \begin_inset space ~
1387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1391 \begin_inset space ~
1400 with the only difference being that it acts on text only.
1401 It will paste the text in the clipboard such that the whole text selection
1402 is inserted as one paragraph.
1403 A new paragraph is only started where there is a blank line in the text.
1407 \begin_inset space ~
1412 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph.
1413 This is useful when copying contents of tables from webpages to a table
1419 \begin_inset space ~
1422 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1424 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1428 \begin_inset space ~
1436 \begin_inset space ~
1439 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1442 paste from the primary selection.
1443 This is normally the currently selected text.
1446 \begin_layout Standard
1449 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1451 \begin_inset space ~
1455 \begin_inset space ~
1463 \begin_inset space ~
1467 \begin_inset space ~
1473 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466403
1475 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466406
1479 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1482 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466954
1487 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1490 \begin_inset space ~
1501 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466364
1503 \begin_inset space ~
1507 \change_deleted -712698321 1613466368
1509 \begin_inset space ~
1517 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466698
1531 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1535 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126824
1539 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466747
1543 \begin_inset space ~
1555 arg "word-find-backward"
1558 shortcut) to search backwards
1562 \change_inserted -712698321 1613466989
1563 Even if you close the widget,
1572 arg "word-find-backward"
1575 will search further.
1580 \begin_layout Standard
1582 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467040
1587 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1590 \begin_inset space ~
1595 field and searches the next match.
1601 \begin_inset space ~
1606 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1608 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467539
1610 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467537
1614 \begin_layout Standard
1616 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467208
1617 Furthermore, the following options are available:
1620 \begin_layout Itemize
1623 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467225
1629 \begin_inset space ~
1635 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467228
1638 can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search word.
1639 If the toggle is set, searching for
1640 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1651 will not match the word
1652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1665 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467232
1669 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467234
1676 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467207
1680 \change_deleted -712698321 1613467237
1685 can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1686 to only find complete words, e.
1687 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1691 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126824
1695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1720 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467241
1724 \begin_layout Itemize
1727 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467258
1732 will limit search and replace, or replace all, to the current cursor selection.
1735 \begin_layout Itemize
1738 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467288
1743 starts searching (forwards) immediately on input, without pressing the
1747 \begin_inset space ~
1755 \begin_layout Itemize
1757 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467400
1762 starts from the beginning/end of the document if the end/beginning has
1763 been reached without asking.
1764 If this is not checked, a dialog will pop up asking you what to do.
1765 Note that responding to this dialog makes the cursor leave the search widget,
1766 so you need to put it back manually.
1769 \begin_layout Standard
1770 \paragraph_spacing single
1772 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1773 The widget also has a
1777 button that lets you shrink the widget to only the first row (the search
1778 widget), hiding replace and options.
1780 \change_deleted 630872221 1620400535
1782 \change_inserted -712698321 1613467875
1787 button brings you back to the full size.
1790 \begin_layout Standard
1791 \paragraph_spacing single
1794 also offers an advanced
1797 \begin_inset space ~
1801 \begin_inset space ~
1806 feature that is described in section
1807 \begin_inset space ~
1811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1813 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1820 \begin_layout Standard
1821 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1822 \begin_inset space \space{}
1826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1830 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1834 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1836 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1841 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1848 \begin_layout Standard
1852 arg "inset-select-all"
1855 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1856 When the cursor is inside an inset
1859 arg "inset-select-all"
1862 selects the content of the inset.
1866 arg "inset-select-all"
1869 consecutively will increase the selection scope to the whole inset and
1870 then to the whole document.
1874 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1877 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1881 \begin_layout Section
1883 \begin_inset Index idx
1886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1893 \begin_inset Index idx
1896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1903 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1905 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1912 \begin_layout Standard
1913 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1915 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1918 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1921 or the toolbar button
1928 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1930 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1933 or the toolbar button
1940 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1947 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1948 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1951 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1954 \begin_layout Standard
1956 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338243
1957 Note that if you undo all changes to arrive at the document as it was last
1959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1966 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1967 This is a consequence of the 100
1968 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1971 step undo limit mentioned above.
1974 \begin_layout Standard
1983 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1985 However they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by
1989 \begin_layout Section
1991 \begin_inset Index idx
1994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_layout Standard
2004 These are the most basic mouse operations.
2007 \begin_layout Enumerate
2012 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 once anywhere in the edit window.
2018 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
2022 \begin_layout Enumerate
2027 \begin_layout Itemize
2034 highlights the text between the old and new mouse positions.
2037 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2040 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
2041 's buffer (and the clipboard).
2043 \change_inserted 5863208 1598175891
2044 You can also use the context menu triggered by right clicking on the selected
2050 \begin_layout Itemize
2051 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
2054 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
2061 \begin_layout Enumerate
2062 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
2066 \begin_layout Standard
2067 Right-click on them to set their properties.
2068 Check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
2072 \begin_layout Section
2074 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2076 name "sec:Navigating"
2081 \begin_inset Index idx
2084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2093 \begin_layout Standard
2095 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
2098 \begin_layout Itemize
2103 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
2104 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
2107 \begin_layout Itemize
2108 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
2110 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
2112 \begin_inset space ~
2117 or by the toolbar button
2120 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
2126 \begin_layout Itemize
2127 You can set bookmarks in your document under
2129 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2132 and use the same menu to return to them.
2133 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
2136 \begin_layout Standard
2140 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
2145 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
2146 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
2148 \begin_inset space ~
2153 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
2154 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
2155 to another document part to look for something and want to go back to your
2156 last editing position.
2159 \begin_layout Standard
2164 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
2168 \begin_layout Subsection
2170 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2172 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
2177 \begin_inset Index idx
2180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2181 Navigating ! Outline
2187 \begin_inset Index idx
2190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2199 \begin_layout Standard
2200 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window you can choose between
2201 several different lists including other TOC-like objects such as lists
2202 of tables and figures, footnotes, labels and cross-references (see section
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2209 reference "sec:Cross-References"
2213 ), notes, or citations (see section
2214 \begin_inset space ~
2218 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2220 reference "sec:Bibliography"
2225 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2230 In many cases right clicking on elements in the Outline opens a context
2231 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
2232 For example with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
2233 dialog and to modify the citation.
2236 \begin_layout Standard
2241 field at the top allows you to filter which entries appear in the outline.
2242 For example, if you are displaying the list of
2244 Labels and References
2246 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
2248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2255 in the filter and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
2258 \begin_layout Standard
2259 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons that allow you to further
2260 control the display.
2265 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
2266 Otherwise the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
2271 option keeps it in the current view state.
2272 Keeping means that when you have the subsections of sections
2273 \begin_inset space ~
2276 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
2277 \begin_inset space ~
2280 3, the subsections of sections
2281 \begin_inset space ~
2284 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
2289 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
2290 \begin_inset space ~
2294 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
2296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2304 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
2307 \begin_layout Standard
2314 button refreshes the TOC (
2315 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2317 \change_inserted 5863208 1598176913
2321 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2323 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2327 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2331 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2335 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2339 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2341 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2345 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2347 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2351 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2353 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2357 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2361 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2363 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2367 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2371 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2375 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2379 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2383 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2387 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2391 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2395 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126825
2397 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126825
2401 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
2415 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
2416 For example, you can move section
2417 \begin_inset space ~
2421 \begin_inset space ~
2424 2.4 or after section
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2430 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
2443 (or the corresponding key bindings
2451 ) you can change the level of sections.
2452 You can make section
2453 \begin_inset space ~
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset space ~
2467 \begin_layout Standard
2468 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
2469 section to copy, cut or delete it.
2472 \begin_layout Subsection
2473 Horizontal Scrolling
2474 \begin_inset Index idx
2477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2478 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
2486 \begin_layout Standard
2488 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because standard output page formats
2490 \begin_inset space ~
2493 A4 are not as wide as PC or laptop screens.
2494 Therefore you will have trouble with the output of your document if document
2495 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
2499 \begin_layout Standard
2500 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
2504 \begin_layout Itemize
2506 is used on a small tablet computer
2509 \begin_layout Itemize
2510 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2522 \begin_inset space ~
2535 \begin_layout Itemize
2536 Math constructs with long command names
2539 \begin_layout Standard
2540 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2541 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2543 As an example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2544 window so that table
2545 \begin_inset space ~
2549 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2551 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2556 You will now see a dotted red line on the right and/or left side of the
2558 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2559 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2562 \begin_layout Standard
2563 \begin_inset Float table
2570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2571 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2574 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2576 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2580 Horizontal scrolling test.
2588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2590 \begin_inset Tabular
2591 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2592 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2593 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2594 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2595 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2637 \begin_layout Section
2638 Input/Word Completion
2639 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2641 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2646 \begin_inset Index idx
2649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2656 \begin_inset Index idx
2659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2690 \begin_layout Standard
2692 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2694 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2695 is used to propose completions.
2698 \begin_layout Standard
2699 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2702 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2707 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2714 \begin_inset space ~
2718 \begin_inset space ~
2723 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2727 \begin_inset space ~
2732 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2733 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2737 \begin_inset space ~
2743 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2744 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2745 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2746 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2749 \begin_layout Standard
2751 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2752 completions available.
2757 key to accept a proposed completion.
2758 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2759 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys
2760 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
2763 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2770 \begin_layout Standard
2771 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2772 ing options for text.
2774 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340017
2776 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340019
2778 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340019
2781 he special math option
2785 enables characters to be composed.
2787 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180192
2789 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180192
2793 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180208
2796 you want to insert the character
2797 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2801 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180217
2804 input the characters
2805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2817 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180228
2819 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180229
2823 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180234
2825 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180235
2830 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180245
2832 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180246
2835 his is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the
2838 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180267
2840 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180267
2843 supported character combinations can be found in the file
2848 \change_deleted 5863208 1598180288
2850 \change_inserted 5863208 1598180288
2854 's installation folder.
2856 \change_deleted -563046850 1560340086
2857 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2864 \change_inserted -563046850 1560340324
2869 after autocorrection has done its magic leaves the un-corrected sequence.
2870 In the example above,
2875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2907 \begin_layout Section
2909 \begin_inset Index idx
2912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2919 \begin_inset Index idx
2922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2951 \begin_inset Index idx
2954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2985 \begin_layout Standard
2986 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
3000 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
3003 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
3007 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
3008 \begin_inset space ~
3012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3014 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
3021 \begin_layout Standard
3025 \begin_inset space ~
3033 \begin_inset space ~
3054 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
3058 \begin_layout Labeling
3059 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3063 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3064 LatexCommand nomenclature
3066 description "Tabulator key"
3073 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
3075 If you do not understand this, go read sections
3076 \begin_inset space ~
3080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3082 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
3087 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3089 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
3093 , especially section
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3100 reference "subsec:Lists"
3106 If you are still confused, look in the
3111 \begin_inset Newline newline
3119 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
3120 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
3124 \begin_layout Labeling
3125 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3129 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3130 LatexCommand nomenclature
3132 description "Escape key"
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3147 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
3148 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
3151 \begin_layout Labeling
3152 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3157 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
3158 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
3162 \begin_layout Standard
3163 There are three modifier keys:
3166 \begin_layout Labeling
3167 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3181 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3185 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3186 LatexCommand nomenclature
3188 description "Control key"
3193 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses depending
3194 on which keys it is used in combination with:
3198 \begin_layout Itemize
3207 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
3210 \begin_layout Itemize
3219 , it moves by words instead of characters.
3222 \begin_layout Itemize
3231 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
3235 \begin_layout Labeling
3236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3250 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3254 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3255 LatexCommand nomenclature
3257 description "Shift key"
3262 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
3263 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
3266 \begin_layout Labeling
3267 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3285 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
3286 LatexCommand nomenclature
3288 description "Alt or Meta key"
3293 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
3294 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
3295 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
3301 \begin_inset Newline newline
3304 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
3306 menu accelerator keys
3309 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
3310 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 For example, the sequence
3316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3322 \begin_inset space ~
3326 \begin_inset space ~
3332 \begin_inset space ~
3340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3359 \begin_inset space ~
3365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3375 \begin_layout Standard
3380 manual lists all other things bound to the
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3389 You will learn more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
3391 most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom
3393 's main window describing the name of the action you have just triggered
3394 and any existing key bindings for that action.
3396 menus also list the defined key bindings.
3397 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
3398 in this documentation so you should not have any problems understanding
3400 However notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
3401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3409 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3416 followed by a capital
3423 \begin_layout Chapter
3426 \begin_inset Index idx
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3439 \begin_layout Section
3441 \begin_inset Index idx
3444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3453 \begin_layout Subsection
3457 \begin_layout Standard
3458 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
3459 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
3460 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
3461 numbering schemes, and so on.
3462 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
3463 and format the title of your document differently.
3466 \begin_layout Standard
3471 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
3472 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
3473 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
3474 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
3475 picks one for you by default.
3476 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
3479 \begin_layout Subsection
3481 \begin_inset Index idx
3484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3493 name "sec:Document-Classes"
3500 \begin_layout Standard
3501 You can select a class using the
3503 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3504 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3508 \begin_inset Index idx
3511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3518 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
3522 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3526 \begin_layout Standard
3527 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
3532 \begin_layout Description
3533 Article for basic articles
3536 \begin_layout Description
3537 Report for basic reports
3540 \begin_layout Description
3541 Book for writing a book
3544 \begin_layout Description
3545 Letter for US-style letters
3548 \begin_layout Standard
3549 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
3550 only uses if you have installed
3551 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
3552 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
3553 distributions will include
3555 Here are some of the classes.
3556 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
3558 Special Document Classes
3567 \begin_layout Description
3568 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
3571 \begin_layout Description
3572 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
3576 \begin_layout Description
3577 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
3581 \begin_layout Description
3582 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
3583 Mathematical Society (AMS).
3584 There are three article layouts available.
3585 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
3586 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
3587 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
3588 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
3590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3593 sequential numbering
3594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3597 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3598 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3599 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3600 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3603 \begin_layout Description
3604 Beamer Layout for presentations
3607 \begin_layout Description
3608 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3609 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3610 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3611 with \SpecialChar LyX
3615 \begin_layout Description
3616 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3619 \begin_layout Description
3621 \begin_inset space ~
3624 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3627 \begin_layout Description
3628 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3631 \begin_layout Description
3632 Foils Used to make transparencies
3635 \begin_layout Description
3636 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3637 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3638 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3639 with \SpecialChar LyX
3643 \begin_layout Description
3644 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3645 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3648 \begin_layout Description
3649 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3652 \begin_layout Description
3653 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3656 \begin_layout Description
3657 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3658 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3659 (Is used by this document.)
3662 \begin_layout Description
3663 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3666 \begin_layout Description
3667 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3670 \begin_layout Description
3675 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3676 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3678 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3682 \begin_layout Description
3683 Slides Used to make transparencies
3686 \begin_layout Description
3688 \begin_inset space ~
3691 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3692 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3695 \begin_layout Description
3696 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3699 \begin_layout Standard
3700 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3702 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3704 Special Document Classes
3711 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3712 of the document classes.
3715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3719 \begin_layout Standard
3720 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3722 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3723 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3725 \begin_inset Index idx
3728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3745 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3746 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3748 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3751 \begin_layout Standard
3754 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3759 , are highly specialized.
3761 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3762 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3763 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3764 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3765 by some document class.
3766 There are just too many of them.
3767 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3770 \begin_layout Standard
3771 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3772 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3776 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3779 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3780 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3781 document class for a new file.
3783 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3786 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3793 manual for information on how to install them.
3794 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3800 \begin_layout Standard
3801 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3802 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3803 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3804 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3805 class files to be used for dissertation
3806 s submitted to those universities.
3807 The \SpecialChar LyX
3808 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3810 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3814 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3820 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3825 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3827 name "subsec:Modules"
3832 \begin_inset Index idx
3835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3844 \begin_layout Standard
3845 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3846 chosen document class.
3847 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3848 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3859 \begin_inset Index idx
3862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3869 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3873 \begin_layout Standard
3874 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3875 packages or file format converters that are not always
3876 installed by default.
3878 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3879 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3880 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3881 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3883 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3884 file without the missing prerequisites.
3885 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3886 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3889 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3893 \begin_inset Index idx
3896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3897 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3904 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126826
3908 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3912 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3921 \change_deleted 5863208 1598126829
3923 \change_inserted 5863208 1598126829
3934 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3937 \begin_layout Standard
3938 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3946 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3948 will advise you about these things.
3956 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3958 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3960 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3965 \begin_inset Index idx
3968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3969 Document ! Local Layout
3977 \begin_layout Standard
3978 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3979 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3980 : They are intended to be used in
3981 a variety of different documents.
3982 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3983 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3984 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3985 need a specific inset or
3986 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757388
3988 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182122
3991 style only that one time.
3992 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3994 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4012 manual for information on how to use it.
4015 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4019 \begin_layout Standard
4020 Each class has a default set of options.
4021 Here's a quick table describing them:
4024 \begin_layout Standard
4025 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4031 \begin_layout Standard
4033 \begin_inset Tabular
4034 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
4035 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
4036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4037 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4038 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4039 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4040 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
4042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4324 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4378 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
4454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
4472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4494 \begin_layout Standard
4495 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
4501 \begin_layout Standard
4502 You're probably also wondering what
4503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4507 \begin_inset space ~
4511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4515 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
4516 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
4521 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
4526 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
4536 headings, there are also
4544 headings, and so on.
4545 We will describe these headings fully in section
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4550 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4552 reference "subsec:Headings"
4559 \begin_layout Subsection
4561 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4563 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
4568 \begin_inset Index idx
4571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4578 \begin_inset Index idx
4581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4590 \begin_layout Standard
4591 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
4593 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4600 \begin_inset space ~
4608 \begin_inset space ~
4613 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
4615 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
4616 doesn't support special options you want to
4617 use for your document.
4618 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
4619 -class and its options, you have to read
4623 \begin_layout Standard
4625 \change_deleted -712698321 1597235163
4629 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182166
4633 \begin_inset space ~
4640 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4646 \begin_inset space ~
4651 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4652 You can choose between the following five options:
4655 \begin_layout Labeling
4656 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4661 Use default page style of current class.
4664 \begin_layout Labeling
4665 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4670 No page numbers or headings.
4673 \begin_layout Labeling
4674 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4682 \begin_layout Labeling
4683 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4688 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4689 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4690 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4691 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4694 \begin_layout Labeling
4695 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4700 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4701 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4707 \begin_inset Index idx
4710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4718 How they are defined is explained in section
4719 \begin_inset space ~
4723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4725 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4733 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4734 \begin_inset space ~
4738 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4740 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4747 \begin_layout Subsection
4748 Paper Size and Orientation
4749 \begin_inset Index idx
4752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4753 Document ! Paper size
4759 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4761 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4768 \begin_layout Standard
4769 You can find the following options in the menu
4772 \begin_inset space ~
4779 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4783 \begin_inset Index idx
4786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4795 \begin_layout Labeling
4796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4800 \begin_inset space ~
4805 What size paper to print on.
4810 \begin_layout Itemize
4816 \begin_layout Itemize
4822 \begin_layout Itemize
4828 \begin_layout Itemize
4834 \begin_layout Itemize
4837 US letter, US legal, US executive
4840 \begin_layout Itemize
4846 \begin_layout Itemize
4853 \begin_layout Labeling
4854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4859 To choose whether to output as
4870 \begin_layout Labeling
4871 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4875 \begin_inset space ~
4880 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4881 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4884 \begin_layout Subsection
4886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4888 name "subsec:Margins"
4893 \begin_inset Index idx
4896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4903 \begin_inset Index idx
4906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4915 \begin_layout Standard
4916 Paper margins are set in the menu
4918 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4922 \begin_inset Index idx
4925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4934 \begin_layout Standard
4935 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4936 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4937 the paper format and the font size into account.
4940 \begin_layout Subsection
4944 \begin_layout Standard
4945 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4946 has to convert everything into the new
4948 That includes the paragraph environments.
4949 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4950 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4951 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4953 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4954 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4958 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4962 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4964 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4965 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4966 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4969 \begin_layout Section
4970 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4971 \begin_inset Index idx
4974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4975 Paragraph ! Indentation
4983 \begin_layout Subsection
4985 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4987 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4994 \begin_layout Standard
4995 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4996 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4999 \begin_layout Standard
5000 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
5001 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
5002 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
5003 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
5007 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
5013 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
5014 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
5015 language than English.
5017 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
5020 \begin_layout Standard
5021 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
5022 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
5023 into \SpecialChar LyX
5025 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
5028 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
5030 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
5031 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
5032 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
5037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5039 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
5040 goes to produce a printable file.
5045 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
5047 gives you the ability globally to change
5051 these pre-coded spacings.
5052 We will explain more later.
5055 \begin_layout Subsection
5056 Paragraph Separation
5057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5059 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
5064 \begin_inset Index idx
5067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5068 Paragraph ! Separation
5076 \begin_layout Standard
5084 \begin_inset space ~
5092 \begin_inset space ~
5099 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5103 \begin_inset Index idx
5106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5112 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
5115 \begin_layout Subsection
5119 \begin_layout Standard
5120 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
5123 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5125 \begin_inset space ~
5130 dialog and toggle the
5133 \begin_inset space ~
5138 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
5141 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
5145 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
5146 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
5150 \begin_layout Standard
5151 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
5152 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
5155 \begin_layout Subsection
5157 \begin_inset Index idx
5160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5161 Paragraph ! Line spacing
5169 \begin_layout Standard
5172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5176 \begin_inset Index idx
5179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5188 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
5192 \begin_inset space ~
5201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5202 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
5208 \begin_inset Index idx
5211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5218 installed to use this feature.
5223 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
5225 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
5227 \begin_inset space ~
5232 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
5233 is normally defined in the environment's style.
5236 \begin_layout Section
5237 Paragraph Environments
5238 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5240 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
5245 \begin_inset Index idx
5248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5249 Paragraph ! Environments
5255 \begin_inset Index idx
5258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5259 Paragraph environments|(
5267 \begin_layout Subsection
5271 \begin_layout Standard
5272 Paragraph environments correspond to the
5275 \begin_layout Standard
5284 } \SpecialChar ldots
5294 \begin_inset Newline newline
5297 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
5299 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
5300 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
5301 alien to you, we urge you to read the
5310 also contains many more examples than this section does.
5313 \begin_layout Standard
5314 A paragraph environment is simply a
5315 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5319 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5322 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
5323 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
5324 scheme, labels, and so on.
5325 Additionally, you can
5326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5333 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
5334 to inherit some of the properties of another.
5335 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
5336 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
5338 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
5340 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
5343 \begin_layout Standard
5344 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
5345 \begin_inset Graphics
5346 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
5352 at the left end of the toolbar.
5354 will change the environment of the
5358 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
5359 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
5360 you select them before choosing the new environment.
5363 \begin_layout Standard
5372 create a new paragraph using the
5376 paragraph environment.
5378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5382 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5385 because if you are in one of these environments:
5388 \begin_layout Itemize
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5400 \begin_layout Itemize
5406 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5418 \begin_layout Itemize
5424 \begin_layout Itemize
5430 \begin_layout Standard
5432 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
5436 , rather than resetting it to
5441 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
5442 \begin_inset space ~
5446 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5448 reference "sec:Nesting"
5455 \begin_layout Subsection
5459 \begin_layout Standard
5460 The default paragraph environment is
5465 It creates a plain paragraph.
5467 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
5468 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
5469 this manual) are in the
5476 \begin_layout Standard
5477 You can nest a paragraph using the
5481 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
5489 \begin_layout Subsection
5491 \begin_inset Index idx
5494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
5505 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
5507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5514 for thanks or contact information.
5515 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5516 places all of this on a separate page
5517 along with today's date.
5518 For other types of documents, the title
5519 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5523 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5526 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5531 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
5545 Here's how you use them:
5548 \begin_layout Itemize
5549 Put the title of your document in the
5556 \begin_layout Itemize
5557 Put the author name in the
5564 \begin_layout Itemize
5565 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
5566 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
5572 Note that using this environment is optional.
5573 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
5574 will automatically insert today's date.
5575 If you don't want a date, use the option
5577 Suppress default date on front page
5581 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5582 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
5584 \begin_inset space ~
5592 \begin_layout Standard
5593 You can use footnotes to insert
5594 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5601 or contact information.
5604 \begin_layout Subsection
5606 \begin_inset Index idx
5609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5616 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5618 name "subsec:Headings"
5625 \begin_layout Standard
5626 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5628 takes care of the numbering for you.
5631 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5633 \begin_inset Index idx
5636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5637 Section headings ! Numbered
5645 \begin_layout Standard
5646 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5650 \begin_layout Enumerate
5656 \begin_layout Enumerate
5662 \begin_layout Enumerate
5668 \begin_layout Enumerate
5674 \begin_layout Enumerate
5680 \begin_layout Enumerate
5686 \begin_layout Enumerate
5692 \begin_layout Standard
5694 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5695 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5696 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with
5697 \change_inserted 5863208 1598182388
5699 \change_deleted 5863208 1598182398
5701 \change_deleted -131811572 1596358192
5707 \begin_layout Standard
5708 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5709 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5710 You group the book into chapters.
5712 does a similar grouping:
5715 \begin_layout Itemize
5720 is divided into either
5731 \begin_layout Itemize
5743 \begin_layout Itemize
5755 \begin_layout Itemize
5767 \begin_layout Itemize
5779 \begin_layout Itemize
5791 \begin_layout Standard
5792 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 Not all document types use the
5804 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5809 is the top-level heading.
5817 \begin_layout Standard
5822 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5823 labels it with its number,
5824 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5826 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5838 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5840 \begin_inset Index idx
5843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5844 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5852 \begin_layout Standard
5853 The unnumbered section headings have a
5854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5861 at the end of their name.
5862 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5863 the table of contents, see section
5864 \begin_inset space ~
5868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5877 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5878 Changing the Numbering
5879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5881 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5888 \begin_layout Standard
5889 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5890 in the Table of Contents.
5891 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5893 Just as certain classes start with
5907 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5917 This is something you can change.
5920 \begin_layout Standard
5923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5927 \begin_inset Index idx
5930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5939 \begin_inset space ~
5943 \begin_inset space ~
5948 you will see two counters.
5953 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5954 numbers a section heading.
5955 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5959 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5960 Short Titles of Headings
5961 \begin_inset Index idx
5964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5965 Section headings ! Short titles
5971 \begin_inset Argument 1
5974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5981 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5983 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5990 \begin_layout Standard
5991 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5992 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5993 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5994 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5997 \begin_layout Standard
5999 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
6000 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
6001 avoiding the problem mentioned.
6002 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
6005 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6007 \begin_inset space ~
6013 This will insert a box labeled
6014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6018 \begin_inset space ~
6022 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6025 which you can use to enter the short title text.
6026 This also works for captions inside floats.
6027 There can only be one short title per title.
6030 \begin_layout Standard
6031 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
6034 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6038 \begin_layout Standard
6039 The following information applies to all section headings:
6042 \begin_layout Itemize
6043 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
6046 \begin_layout Itemize
6047 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
6050 \begin_layout Itemize
6051 You can only use inline math in these environments.
6054 \begin_layout Itemize
6055 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
6058 \begin_layout Subsection
6062 \begin_layout Standard
6064 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
6078 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
6079 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
6080 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
6081 the text they contain.
6082 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
6090 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
6093 \begin_layout Standard
6094 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
6103 when you start a new paragraph.
6104 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
6108 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
6109 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
6110 have to change back to the
6114 environment yourself.
6117 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6126 \begin_inset Index idx
6129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6138 \begin_layout Standard
6139 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
6140 time for the differences.
6149 are identical except for one difference:
6153 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
6162 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 Here's an example of the
6179 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
6181 See – no indentation!
6185 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
6186 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
6187 the other paragraph.
6190 \begin_layout Standard
6191 Here's another example, this time in the
6198 \begin_layout Quotation
6204 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
6205 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
6206 the first line, then
6210 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
6214 you were quoting other text.
6217 \begin_layout Quotation
6218 Here's a new paragraph.
6219 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
6220 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
6223 \begin_layout Standard
6224 As the examples show,
6228 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
6229 They should put quotes in the
6234 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
6238 paragraph environment for quoted text.
6241 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6243 \begin_inset Index idx
6246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6253 \begin_inset Index idx
6256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6263 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6272 \begin_layout Standard
6277 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
6283 \begin_inset Newline newline
6286 Which I did not rehearse!
6290 It could be much worse.
6291 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
6293 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
6294 indented a bit more than the first.
6295 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
6301 \begin_inset Newline newline
6304 And make things look fine
6305 \begin_inset Newline newline
6311 arg "newline-insert newline"
6317 \begin_layout Standard
6322 does not indent both margins.
6323 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
6324 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
6327 arg "newline-insert newline"
6333 \begin_layout Subsection
6335 \begin_inset Index idx
6338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6354 \begin_layout Standard
6356 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
6366 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6367 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
6376 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
6377 lets you provide your own label.
6378 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
6379 describing some general features of all four of them.
6382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6386 \begin_layout Standard
6387 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
6389 First, \SpecialChar LyX
6390 treats each paragraph as a list item.
6399 reset the environment to
6403 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
6404 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
6405 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
6409 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
6413 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
6420 \begin_layout Standard
6421 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
6422 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
6423 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
6425 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
6426 you read all of section
6427 \begin_inset space ~
6431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6433 reference "sec:Nesting"
6440 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6442 \begin_inset Index idx
6445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6461 \begin_layout Standard
6462 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
6466 paragraph environment.
6467 It has the following properties:
6470 \begin_layout Itemize
6471 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
6475 \begin_layout Itemize
6477 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
6480 \begin_layout Itemize
6481 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
6485 \begin_layout Itemize
6486 The items can have any length.
6488 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
6489 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
6496 \begin_layout Itemize
6501 environment inside another
6505 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
6509 \begin_layout Itemize
6510 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
6513 \begin_layout Itemize
6515 always shows the same symbol on screen.
6518 \begin_layout Itemize
6520 \begin_inset space ~
6524 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6526 reference "sec:Nesting"
6530 for a full explanation of nesting.
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6535 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
6544 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6547 \begin_layout Standard
6548 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6549 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6552 \begin_layout Itemize
6553 The label for the first level
6557 is a large black dot, or bullet.
6561 \begin_layout Itemize
6562 The label for the second level is a dash.
6566 \begin_layout Itemize
6567 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6571 \begin_layout Itemize
6572 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6576 \begin_layout Itemize
6577 Back out to the third level.
6581 \begin_layout Itemize
6582 Back to the second level.
6586 \begin_layout Itemize
6587 Back to the outermost level.
6590 \begin_layout Standard
6591 These are the default labels for an
6596 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6598 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6601 dialog in the submenu
6606 \begin_inset Index idx
6609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6615 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6619 \begin_layout Standard
6620 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6621 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
6623 \begin_inset space ~
6627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6629 reference "sec:Nesting"
6636 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6638 \begin_inset Index idx
6641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6650 name "sec:Enumerate"
6657 \begin_layout Standard
6662 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6663 It has these properties:
6666 \begin_layout Enumerate
6667 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6671 \begin_layout Enumerate
6672 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6676 \begin_layout Enumerate
6678 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6681 \begin_layout Enumerate
6686 environment resets the counter to one.
6689 \begin_layout Enumerate
6702 \begin_layout Enumerate
6703 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6704 Items can have any length.
6707 \begin_layout Enumerate
6708 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6711 \begin_layout Enumerate
6712 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6715 \begin_layout Enumerate
6716 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6720 \begin_layout Standard
6729 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6731 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6732 labels the four different levels in an
6739 \begin_layout Enumerate
6740 The first level of an
6744 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6748 \begin_layout Enumerate
6749 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6753 \begin_layout Enumerate
6754 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6758 \begin_layout Enumerate
6759 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6762 \begin_layout Enumerate
6763 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6768 \begin_layout Enumerate
6769 Back to the third level
6773 \begin_layout Enumerate
6774 Back to the second level.
6778 \begin_layout Enumerate
6779 Back to the outermost level.
6782 \begin_layout Standard
6783 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6787 environment, see section
6788 \begin_inset space ~
6792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6794 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6799 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6803 \begin_layout Standard
6804 There is more to nesting
6808 environments than we've stated here.
6809 You should read section
6810 \begin_inset space ~
6814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6816 reference "sec:Nesting"
6820 to learn more about nesting.
6823 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6825 \begin_inset Index idx
6828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6837 \begin_layout Standard
6838 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6842 list has no fixed label.
6843 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6845 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6852 of the first line as the label.
6856 \begin_layout Description
6857 Example: This is an example of the
6864 \begin_layout Standard
6866 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6870 \begin_layout Standard
6872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6876 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6879 it is meant that the first usage of the
6883 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6885 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6893 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6899 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6901 \begin_inset space ~
6907 \begin_inset space ~
6911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6913 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6917 for more information.) Here is an example:
6920 \begin_layout Description
6922 \begin_inset space ~
6925 Example: This one shows how to use a
6928 \begin_inset space ~
6940 \begin_layout Description
6941 Usage: You should use the
6945 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6946 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6948 It's not a good idea to use a
6952 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6953 You're better off using
6965 paragraphs into them.
6968 \begin_layout Description
6969 Nesting: You can nest
6973 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6977 \begin_layout Standard
6978 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6979 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6980 them from the first line.
6983 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6985 \begin_inset Index idx
6988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6997 \begin_layout Standard
7002 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7003 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
7007 \begin_layout Standard
7016 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
7018 Here are its properties:
7021 \begin_layout Labeling
7022 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7024 \begin_inset space ~
7027 labels \SpecialChar LyX
7029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7036 of each line as the item label.
7041 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
7042 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
7043 space as described above.
7046 \begin_layout Labeling
7047 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7048 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
7049 uses different margins for the item label and the
7050 body of the item text.
7051 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
7052 label width plus a little extra space.
7055 \begin_layout Labeling
7056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7058 \begin_inset space ~
7061 width \SpecialChar LyX
7062 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
7063 If the label width is larger, the label
7064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7068 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7071 into the first line.
7072 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
7073 margin of the rest of the item text.
7076 \begin_layout Labeling
7077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7079 \begin_inset space ~
7082 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
7087 environment has the same left margin.
7088 \begin_inset Newline newline
7091 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
7094 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
7096 \begin_inset space ~
7101 dialog (toolbar button
7104 arg "layout-paragraph"
7111 \begin_inset space ~
7116 determines the default label width.
7117 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
7119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7126 multiple times instead.
7127 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
7130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7137 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
7140 \begin_inset space ~
7145 every time you alter a label in a
7150 \begin_inset Newline newline
7153 The predefined default width is the length of
7154 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7158 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7162 \begin_inset space ~
7168 \begin_layout Standard
7173 list the same way as the
7177 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
7183 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
7187 \begin_layout Standard
7192 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
7193 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
7195 \begin_inset space ~
7199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7201 reference "sec:Nesting"
7205 to learn about nesting.
7208 \begin_layout Standard
7209 There is yet another feature of the
7213 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
7214 left-justifies the item labels by
7216 You can use additional
7220 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
7221 justifies the item label.
7226 are documented in section
7227 \begin_inset space ~
7231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7233 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
7238 Here are some examples:
7241 \begin_layout Labeling
7242 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7243 Left The default for
7250 \begin_layout Labeling
7251 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7252 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7259 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
7262 \begin_layout Labeling
7263 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
7264 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7268 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
7275 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
7278 \begin_layout Subsection
7280 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7282 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
7287 \begin_inset Index idx
7290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7299 \begin_layout Standard
7300 The features described in this section require that the module
7302 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
7304 is loaded in the document settings.
7305 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7311 \begin_inset Index idx
7314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7325 Custom Enumerate Lists
7326 \begin_inset Index idx
7329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
7338 \begin_layout Standard
7340 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
7343 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7346 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
7347 There you add the command
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7358 \begin_layout Standard
7370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7371 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
7372 Code, look at section
7373 \begin_inset space ~
7377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7379 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7392 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7399 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7400 For capital Roman numerals replace
7412 in the command above.
7413 For Arabic numerals use
7421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7428 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7443 \begin_layout Standard
7445 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7453 You can only number 26
7454 \begin_inset space ~
7457 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7465 \begin_layout Standard
7466 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
7467 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
7470 \begin_layout Standard
7471 Here is a list with custom numbering:
7474 \begin_layout Enumerate
7475 \begin_inset Argument 1
7478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7504 \begin_layout Enumerate
7505 \begin_inset Argument 1
7508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7531 \begin_layout Enumerate
7536 \begin_layout Enumerate
7537 \begin_inset Argument 1
7540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7564 \begin_layout Enumerate
7565 \begin_inset Argument 1
7568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7594 \begin_layout Standard
7595 For this list these commands were used:
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7609 \begin_inset Newline newline
7617 \begin_inset Newline newline
7625 \begin_inset Newline newline
7635 \begin_layout Standard
7642 makes the label emphasized and
7651 \begin_layout Standard
7652 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7660 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7661 lists until you change the definition.
7669 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7671 \begin_inset Index idx
7674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7675 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7683 \begin_layout Standard
7684 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7687 \begin_layout Enumerate
7688 \begin_inset Argument 1
7691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7710 \begin_inset Note Note
7713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7714 goes back to default numbering
7722 \begin_layout Enumerate
7726 \begin_layout Standard
7730 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7734 \begin_layout Standard
7735 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7741 \change_deleted -584632292 1616513280
7742 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7743 to indicate that it is a resumed list
7744 and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7745 , but in the output.
7750 \begin_layout Standard
7751 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7759 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7768 \begin_layout Standard
7769 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7771 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7772 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7773 of a normal enumeration.
7774 There, insert the command
7777 \begin_layout Standard
7783 \begin_layout Standard
7788 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7792 \begin_layout Enumerate
7796 \begin_layout Enumerate
7800 \begin_layout Standard
7801 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7804 \begin_layout Enumerate
7805 \begin_inset Argument 1
7808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 This enumeration starts at 4
7827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7829 \begin_inset Index idx
7832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7841 \begin_layout Standard
7842 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7844 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7847 \begin_layout Itemize
7851 \begin_layout Itemize
7852 with standard spacing
7855 \begin_layout Standard
7856 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7858 Add there the command
7862 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7865 \begin_layout Itemize
7866 \begin_inset Argument 1
7869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7888 \begin_layout Itemize
7892 \begin_layout Itemize
7896 \begin_layout Standard
7897 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7904 \begin_inset Index idx
7907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7915 For more information see its documentation,
7916 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7926 \begin_layout Standard
7927 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7929 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7930 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7931 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7934 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7937 \begin_layout Enumerate
7938 \begin_inset Argument 1
7941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7949 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7962 \begin_layout Enumerate
7963 with negative indentation
7966 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 Further Customization
7968 \begin_inset Index idx
7971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7972 Lists ! Customization
7980 \begin_layout Standard
7981 You can also change the style of description lists.
7985 \begin_layout Standard
7991 \begin_layout Standard
7992 changes the description label font, the command
7995 \begin_layout Standard
8001 \begin_layout Standard
8002 sets the list style.
8005 \begin_layout Standard
8006 An example where the command
8009 \begin_layout Standard
8014 itshape, style=nextline
8017 \begin_layout Standard
8021 \begin_layout Description
8023 \begin_inset space ~
8027 \begin_inset Argument 1
8030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8036 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
8038 itshape, style=nextline
8048 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
8049 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
8053 \begin_layout Description
8055 \begin_inset space ~
8058 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
8059 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
8060 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
8063 \begin_layout Standard
8064 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
8070 \begin_inset Index idx
8073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8081 For more information see its documentation
8082 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
8092 \begin_layout Subsection
8094 \begin_inset Index idx
8097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8106 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8108 \begin_inset space ~
8111 Address: An Overview
8114 \begin_layout Standard
8115 Although \SpecialChar LyX
8116 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
8124 \begin_inset space ~
8130 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
8131 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
8132 gags on the document.
8133 In contrast, you can use the
8140 \begin_inset space ~
8145 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
8146 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
8150 \begin_layout Standard
8151 Of course, you're not limited to using
8158 \begin_inset space ~
8167 \begin_inset space ~
8172 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
8173 some European academic papers.
8176 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8178 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8180 name "sec:Address-Usage"
8187 \begin_layout Standard
8192 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
8193 for the opening and signature in some countries.
8197 \begin_inset space ~
8202 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
8203 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
8204 Here's an example of each:
8207 \begin_layout Right Address
8209 \begin_inset Newline newline
8213 \begin_inset Newline newline
8217 \begin_inset Newline newline
8220 When is it? What is today?
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8227 \begin_inset space ~
8233 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
8235 the largest block of text on a single line.
8236 Here's an example of the
8243 \begin_layout Address
8245 \begin_inset Newline newline
8248 Where do I send this
8249 \begin_inset Newline newline
8252 Your post office and country
8255 \begin_layout Standard
8256 As you can see, both
8263 \begin_inset space ~
8268 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8273 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
8274 resets the nesting depth and sets the
8280 This makes sense, since
8288 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8289 Thus, you have to use
8296 arg "newline-insert newline"
8301 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8302 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8304 \begin_inset space ~
8308 \begin_inset space ~
8313 ) to start a new line in an
8320 \begin_inset space ~
8328 \begin_layout Subsection
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
8334 or list of references.
8336 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8339 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8341 \begin_inset Index idx
8344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8353 \begin_layout Standard
8358 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8359 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8360 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
8361 Also, don't bother trying to nest
8365 in anything else or vice versa.
8371 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8372 The book document classes ignores the
8376 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
8380 in a letter document class.
8383 \begin_layout Standard
8388 environment does several things for you.
8389 First, it puts the centered label
8390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8398 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
8400 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
8401 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
8402 the subsequent text.
8403 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8405 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
8409 \begin_layout Standard
8410 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8414 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8415 The new paragraph will still be in the
8420 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
8421 finish entering the abstract of your document.
8424 \begin_layout Standard
8425 \begin_inset Float figure
8432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8434 \begin_inset Graphics
8435 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
8442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8443 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8448 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8469 \begin_layout Standard
8470 We would love to demonstrate the
8474 environment, but since this document is in the
8475 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8479 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8482 class, we can't do this.
8483 We inserted it therefore as figure
8484 \begin_inset space ~
8488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8490 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8495 If you have never heard of an
8496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8503 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
8506 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8508 \begin_inset Index idx
8511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8520 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8527 \begin_layout Standard
8532 environment is used to list references.
8533 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
8534 only use it at the end of the document.
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 When you first open a
8551 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
8552 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
8553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8568 depending on the document class.
8569 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8570 Each paragraph of the
8574 environment is a bibliography entry.
8579 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8580 Each new paragraph is still in the
8587 \begin_layout Standard
8588 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
8589 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8591 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8593 handling, have a look at section
8594 \begin_inset space ~
8598 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8600 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8607 \begin_layout Subsection
8608 Special Environments
8611 \begin_layout Standard
8613 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
8614 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8617 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8622 \begin_inset Index idx
8625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8635 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8642 \begin_layout Standard
8648 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8650 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8655 key as a fixed whitespace.
8659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8672 \begin_inset space ~
8677 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8695 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8698 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8701 arg "newline-insert newline"
8718 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8719 So, when you finish using the
8724 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8725 Also, you can nest the
8730 environment inside of others.
8733 \begin_layout Standard
8734 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8737 \begin_layout Itemize
8741 arg "newline-insert newline"
8744 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8749 \begin_inset space \space{}
8759 arg "newline-insert newline"
8765 \begin_layout Itemize
8769 arg "newline-insert newline"
8779 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8785 \begin_layout Itemize
8786 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8787 You must put at least one
8791 in any line you want blank.
8792 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8796 \begin_layout Itemize
8797 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8801 since that will insert
8806 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8809 arg "self-insert \""
8815 \begin_layout Standard
8819 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8823 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8827 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8831 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8835 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8836 printf("Hello World!
8841 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8845 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8849 \begin_layout Standard
8850 This is just the standard
8851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8855 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8861 \begin_layout Standard
8867 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8869 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8870 as if you used a typewriter.
8871 \begin_inset Index idx
8874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8875 Paragraph environments|)
8880 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8883 Program Code Listings
8888 \begin_inset space ~
8896 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8900 \begin_inset Index idx
8903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8917 environment is similar to the
8922 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8923 computer console text.
8928 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8942 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8943 you can have empty lines.
8956 \begin_layout Itemize
8957 have a certain language and a text style
8960 \begin_layout Itemize
8961 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8962 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8963 and \SpecialChar TeX
8967 \begin_layout Standard
8968 Because of these properties
8972 works like a typewriter.
8976 \begin_layout Verbatim
8980 \begin_layout Verbatim
8983 The following 2 lines are empty:
8986 \begin_layout Verbatim
8990 \begin_layout Verbatim
8994 \begin_layout Verbatim
8995 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
9000 \begin_layout Standard
9005 environment is identical to
9009 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
9010 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
9017 \begin_layout Verbatim*
9021 \begin_layout Section
9022 Nesting Environments
9023 \begin_inset Index idx
9026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9027 Nesting ! Environments
9033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
9042 \begin_layout Subsection
9046 \begin_layout Standard
9048 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
9050 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
9052 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
9054 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
9056 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9060 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9066 \begin_layout Enumerate
9070 \begin_layout Enumerate
9075 \begin_layout Enumerate
9079 \begin_layout Enumerate
9084 \begin_layout Enumerate
9088 \begin_layout Standard
9089 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
9090 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
9092 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
9094 \begin_inset space ~
9098 \begin_inset space ~
9106 \begin_inset space ~
9110 \begin_inset space ~
9115 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
9117 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
9120 arg "depth-increment"
9126 arg "depth-decrement"
9140 arg "depth-increment"
9146 arg "depth-decrement"
9150 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
9151 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
9155 \begin_layout Standard
9156 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9157 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9158 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9159 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
9160 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9163 \begin_layout Standard
9164 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9166 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
9168 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9171 \begin_layout Subsection
9172 What You Can and Can't Nest
9175 \begin_layout Standard
9176 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
9177 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9180 \begin_layout Standard
9181 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
9182 than a simple yes or no.
9183 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9186 \begin_layout Itemize
9187 Completely unnestable
9190 \begin_layout Itemize
9191 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
9195 \begin_layout Itemize
9196 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
9200 \begin_layout Standard
9201 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
9202 environments have them:
9205 \begin_layout Description
9206 Unnestable Can't nest them.
9207 Can't nest into them.
9211 \begin_layout Itemize
9217 \begin_layout Itemize
9223 \begin_layout Itemize
9229 \begin_layout Itemize
9235 \begin_layout Itemize
9242 \begin_layout Description
9244 \begin_inset space ~
9247 Nestable You can nest them.
9248 You can nest other things into them.
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9258 \begin_layout Itemize
9264 \begin_layout Itemize
9270 \begin_layout Itemize
9276 \begin_layout Itemize
9282 \begin_layout Itemize
9288 \begin_layout Itemize
9294 \begin_layout Itemize
9301 \begin_layout Itemize
9307 \begin_layout Itemize
9314 \begin_layout Description
9315 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
9316 You can't nest anything into them.
9320 \begin_layout Itemize
9326 \begin_layout Itemize
9332 \begin_layout Itemize
9338 \begin_layout Itemize
9344 \begin_layout Itemize
9350 \begin_layout Itemize
9356 \begin_layout Itemize
9362 \begin_layout Itemize
9368 \begin_layout Itemize
9374 \begin_layout Itemize
9380 \begin_layout Itemize
9386 \begin_layout Itemize
9392 \begin_layout Itemize
9398 \begin_layout Itemize
9402 \begin_inset space ~
9408 \begin_layout Itemize
9415 \begin_layout Standard
9416 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9424 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
9434 \begin_inset space ~
9437 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
9438 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
9439 nested section headings violate this.
9447 \begin_layout Subsection
9448 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
9449 \begin_inset Index idx
9452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9453 Nesting ! Tables etc.
9461 \begin_layout Standard
9462 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
9463 affected by nesting anyhow.
9467 \begin_layout Itemize
9471 \begin_layout Itemize
9475 \begin_layout Itemize
9479 \begin_layout Standard
9481 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9489 Figures and tables in
9493 are not affected by this.
9498 Have a look at section
9499 \begin_inset space ~
9503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9505 reference "sec:Floats"
9509 for more information about
9516 \begin_layout Standard
9518 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9519 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
9523 \begin_layout Standard
9524 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
9525 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9529 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9532 of its own, it behaves just like a
9533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9540 paragraph environment.
9541 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
9545 \begin_layout Standard
9546 Here's an example with a table:
9549 \begin_layout Enumerate
9554 \begin_layout Enumerate
9555 This is (a) and it's nested.
9559 \begin_layout Standard
9560 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9566 \begin_layout Standard
9568 \begin_inset Tabular
9569 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9570 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9571 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9572 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9656 \begin_layout Standard
9657 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9664 \begin_layout Enumerate
9666 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9670 \begin_layout Enumerate
9674 \begin_layout Standard
9675 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9678 \begin_layout Enumerate
9683 \begin_layout Enumerate
9684 This is (a) and it's nested.
9688 \begin_layout Standard
9689 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9695 \begin_layout Standard
9697 \begin_inset Tabular
9698 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9699 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9701 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9785 \begin_layout Standard
9786 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9799 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9802 \begin_layout Enumerate
9806 \begin_layout Standard
9807 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9811 \begin_layout Standard
9812 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9815 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9818 \begin_layout Enumerate
9823 \begin_layout Enumerate
9824 This is (a) and it's nested.
9827 \begin_layout Standard
9828 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9834 \begin_layout Standard
9836 \begin_inset Tabular
9837 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9838 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9839 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9840 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9925 \begin_layout Standard
9926 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9932 \begin_layout Enumerate
9934 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9941 \begin_layout Enumerate
9945 \begin_layout Standard
9946 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9952 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9953 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9957 \begin_layout Subsection
9958 Usage and General Features
9961 \begin_layout Standard
9962 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9963 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9965 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9972 is the innermost possible depth.
9973 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9976 \begin_layout Enumerate
9977 level #1 – outermost
9981 \begin_layout Enumerate
9986 \begin_layout Enumerate
9991 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 \begin_layout Itemize
10001 \begin_layout Itemize
10010 \begin_layout Standard
10011 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
10012 both of them in the example.
10013 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
10023 For example, if we tried to nest another
10028 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10035 , we would get errors.
10038 \begin_layout Subsection
10040 \begin_inset Index idx
10043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10052 \begin_layout Standard
10053 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
10054 We have several examples of nested environments.
10055 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
10059 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10060 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
10063 \begin_layout Labeling
10064 \labelwidthstring MMM
10065 #1-a This is the outermost level.
10074 \begin_layout Labeling
10075 \labelwidthstring MMM
10076 #2-a This is level #2.
10077 We created it by using
10080 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10086 arg "depth-increment"
10093 \begin_layout Labeling
10094 \labelwidthstring MMM
10095 #3-a This is level #3.
10096 This time, we just enter
10103 arg "depth-increment"
10107 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10111 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10117 arg "depth-increment"
10124 \begin_layout Standard
10129 environment, nested inside of
10130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10138 So, it's at level #4.
10139 We did this by entering
10142 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10148 arg "depth-increment"
10151 , then changing the paragraph environment to
10156 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
10172 \begin_layout Standard
10177 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
10180 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10186 \begin_layout Labeling
10187 \labelwidthstring MMM
10188 #4-a This is level #4.
10192 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10195 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10200 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
10204 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
10209 keep nesting things inside
10210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10221 \begin_layout Labeling
10222 \labelwidthstring MMM
10223 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10228 \begin_layout Labeling
10229 \labelwidthstring MMM
10230 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10231 and this is level #6.
10232 By now, you should know how we made these two.
10236 \begin_layout Labeling
10237 \labelwidthstring MMM
10238 #5-b Back to level #5.
10242 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10248 arg "depth-decrement"
10255 \begin_layout Labeling
10256 \labelwidthstring MMM
10260 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10266 arg "depth-decrement"
10269 , we're back at level #4.
10273 \begin_layout Labeling
10274 \labelwidthstring MMM
10275 #3-b Back to level #3.
10276 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10280 \begin_layout Labeling
10281 \labelwidthstring MMM
10282 #2-b Back to level #2.
10286 \begin_layout Labeling
10287 \labelwidthstring MMM
10288 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
10289 After this sentence, we will enter
10293 and change the paragraph environment back to
10300 \begin_layout Standard
10301 We could have also used the
10317 environment in place of the
10322 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10326 Example 2: Inheritance
10329 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10330 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
10333 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10342 arg "depth-increment"
10346 \begin_inset Newline newline
10349 which, we will change to the
10357 \begin_layout Enumerate
10362 environment, at level #2.
10365 \begin_layout Enumerate
10366 Notice how the nested
10370 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10374 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
10378 \begin_layout Standard
10379 We ended this example by entering
10384 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10388 and reset the nesting depth by using
10391 arg "depth-decrement"
10397 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10398 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
10407 \begin_inset Argument 1
10410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10411 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
10419 \begin_layout Enumerate
10420 This is level #1, in an
10424 paragraph environment.
10425 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10429 \begin_layout Enumerate
10434 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10440 arg "depth-increment"
10444 Now, what happens if we nest an
10448 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
10449 label be? An asterisk?
10453 \begin_layout Itemize
10463 environment, even though it's at level #3.
10464 So, its label is a bullet.
10465 (We got here by using
10468 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10474 arg "depth-increment"
10477 , then changing the environment to
10485 \begin_layout Itemize
10486 Here's level #4, produced using
10489 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10495 arg "depth-increment"
10499 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10504 \begin_layout Enumerate
10506 to get to level #5.
10507 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10512 Notice the type of numbering, it is
10516 , because we are in the
10524 environment (that is, it is an
10539 \begin_layout Enumerate
10544 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
10545 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10549 \begin_layout Enumerate
10550 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
10553 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10556 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10559 \begin_layout Enumerate
10563 arg "depth-decrement"
10566 to decrease the depth after the next
10569 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10576 \begin_layout Enumerate
10578 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10583 \begin_layout Enumerate
10585 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
10590 \begin_layout Enumerate
10591 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
10600 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
10605 reset the counter for the label.
10609 \begin_layout Enumerate
10613 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10619 arg "depth-decrement"
10622 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
10623 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
10624 into the twofold-nested
10632 \begin_layout Enumerate
10633 The same thing happens if we do another
10636 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10642 arg "depth-decrement"
10645 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10648 \begin_layout Standard
10649 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10654 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10665 The number of other
10669 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10676 The same rule applies for the
10680 environment, as well.
10683 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10684 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10687 \begin_layout Enumerate
10688 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10689 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10690 the same detail with how we did it.
10699 \begin_layout Standard
10707 arg "depth-increment"
10714 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10715 the example in parentheses someplace.
10716 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10717 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10718 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10722 \begin_layout Enumerate
10727 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10731 \begin_layout Verse
10732 Now we will add verse.
10733 \begin_inset Newline newline
10736 It will get much worse.
10737 \begin_inset Newline newline
10747 arg "depth-increment"
10757 \begin_layout Verse
10758 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10759 \begin_inset Newline newline
10762 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10763 \begin_inset Newline newline
10769 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10777 \begin_layout Verse
10778 Here comes a table:
10782 \begin_layout Standard
10783 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10791 \begin_inset Tabular
10792 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10793 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10794 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10795 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10797 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10880 \begin_layout Verse
10884 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10894 arg "depth-increment"
10900 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10906 \begin_inset Newline newline
10914 arg "depth-decrement"
10921 \begin_layout Enumerate
10926 : level #1) This is another item.
10927 Note that selecting a
10931 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10932 3 times to put the table inside the
10939 \begin_layout Quotation
10940 We're now ending the
10944 list and changing to
10949 We're still at level #1.
10950 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10951 The next set of paragraphs is a
10952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10959 We will nest both the
10966 \begin_inset space ~
10971 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10975 for the letter body.
10979 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10982 to preserve the depth.
10983 Remember that you need to use
10986 arg "newline-insert newline"
10989 to create multiple lines inside the
10996 \begin_inset space ~
11006 \begin_layout Right Address
11008 \begin_inset Newline newline
11011 Moosegroin, MT 00100
11012 \begin_inset Newline newline
11018 \begin_layout Address
11020 \begin_inset space ~
11026 \begin_layout Quotation
11027 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11028 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11031 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11032 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
11033 a backlog in our orders for methane.
11034 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
11035 as soon as possible.
11036 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
11039 \begin_layout Quotation
11040 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
11041 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
11042 with your order, along with payment.
11045 \begin_layout Quotation
11046 We thank you again for your patience.
11049 \begin_layout Address
11051 \begin_inset Newline newline
11058 \begin_layout Quotation
11059 That ends that example!
11062 \begin_layout Standard
11063 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11064 gives you a lot of power with just
11066 We could have easily nested an
11087 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11090 \begin_layout Subsection
11092 \begin_inset Index idx
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 Nesting ! Separation
11102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11104 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11111 \begin_layout Standard
11112 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
11114 For example you need two different enumerations:
11117 \begin_layout Enumerate
11122 \begin_layout Enumerate
11127 \begin_layout Enumerate
11131 \begin_layout Standard
11132 \begin_inset Separator plain
11138 \begin_layout Itemize
11144 \begin_layout Standard
11145 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11151 \begin_layout Enumerate
11155 \begin_layout Enumerate
11159 \begin_layout Enumerate
11163 \begin_layout Standard
11164 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
11165 list item and use the menu
11167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11168 Separated <Name> Above
11172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11173 Separated <Name> Below
11176 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11177 ) and before or behind it the
11179 Inside nested environments, it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11182 \begin_layout Standard
11183 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
11184 (red arrow in LyX).
11185 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
11186 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11189 \begin_layout Standard
11190 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
11193 arg "paragraph-break"
11200 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11203 \begin_layout Section
11204 Spacing, Pagination and Line Breaks
11205 \begin_inset Index idx
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11217 \begin_layout Standard
11218 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
11219 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
11221 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
11222 be broken at the end of a line.
11223 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
11227 \begin_layout Subsection
11229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11231 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11236 \begin_inset Index idx
11239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11248 \begin_layout Standard
11249 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11250 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11251 ) not to break the line at
11253 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
11256 \begin_layout Quote
11257 Further documentation is given in section
11258 \begin_inset Newline newline
11262 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11264 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11271 \begin_layout Standard
11272 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11287 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11292 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11296 A protected space is set with
11298 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11299 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11301 \begin_inset space ~
11309 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11315 \begin_layout Subsection
11317 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11319 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11324 \begin_inset Index idx
11327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11328 Spacing ! Horizontal
11336 \begin_layout Standard
11337 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11339 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11340 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11344 The length units are listed in Appendix
11345 \begin_inset space ~
11349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11351 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11362 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11367 \begin_inset Index idx
11370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 Spaces ! Inter-word
11379 \begin_layout Standard
11380 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
11381 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
11382 at the ends of sentences.
11383 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11384 automatically takes care about this.
11385 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
11386 followed by a period; see section
11387 \begin_inset space ~
11391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11393 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11398 To insert a normal space, select
11400 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11401 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11403 \begin_inset space ~
11411 arg "space-insert normal"
11417 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11421 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11426 \begin_inset Index idx
11429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11438 \begin_layout Standard
11440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11447 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11448 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11456 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
11457 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
11458 inside abbreviations:
11461 \begin_layout Quote
11463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11467 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11470 \begin_layout Standard
11471 or between values and units.
11472 Compare for example this:
11473 \begin_inset Newline newline
11477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11481 \begin_inset Newline newline
11484 10 kg (normal space
11487 \begin_layout Standard
11488 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11490 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11491 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11493 \begin_inset space ~
11501 arg "space-insert thin"
11507 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11511 \begin_layout Standard
11512 You can also insert the following space types:
11515 \begin_layout Description
11517 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161965
11519 \begin_inset space ~
11525 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11529 \begin_inset space \medspace{}
11533 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11537 \change_deleted -712698321 1593161991
11539 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161992
11542 space between the arrows.
11543 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162006
11547 \begin_layout Description
11549 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162010
11551 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162011
11555 \begin_inset space ~
11558 space A line with a
11559 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11563 \begin_inset space \thickspace{}
11567 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11571 \change_deleted -712698321 1593162017
11573 \change_inserted -712698321 1593162018
11576 space between the arrows.
11579 \begin_layout Description
11581 \begin_inset space ~
11585 \begin_inset space ~
11588 space A line with a
11589 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11593 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11597 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11600 negative thin space between the arrows.
11603 \begin_layout Description
11605 \begin_inset space ~
11609 \begin_inset space ~
11612 space A line with a
11613 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11617 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11621 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11624 negative medium space between the arrows.
11627 \begin_layout Description
11629 \begin_inset space ~
11633 \begin_inset space ~
11636 space A line with a
11637 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11641 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11645 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11648 negative thick space between the arrows.
11651 \begin_layout Description
11653 \begin_inset space ~
11657 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11661 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11665 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11669 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11673 \begin_inset space ~
11677 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11680 em) space between the arrows.
11683 \begin_layout Description
11685 \begin_inset space ~
11689 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11693 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11697 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11701 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11705 \begin_inset space ~
11709 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11712 em) space between the arrows.
11715 \begin_layout Description
11717 \begin_inset space ~
11721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11725 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11729 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11733 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11737 \begin_inset space ~
11741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11744 em) space between the arrows.
11747 \begin_layout Description
11749 \begin_inset space ~
11753 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11757 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11762 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11766 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11769 cm space between the arrows.
11772 \begin_layout Standard
11774 \begin_inset space ~
11778 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11780 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11784 lists the different space sizes.
11787 \begin_layout Standard
11788 \begin_inset Float table
11795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11796 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11801 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11805 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11815 \begin_inset Tabular
11816 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="12" columns="2">
11817 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11818 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11819 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11859 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11878 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11883 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11907 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11916 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11917 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11922 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11933 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11935 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11944 <row change="inserted -712698321 1593161917">
11945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11950 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11961 \change_inserted -712698321 1593161917
11963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11987 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11991 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12019 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12058 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12086 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12094 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12109 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12127 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12148 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12150 \begin_inset Index idx
12153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12162 \begin_layout Standard
12163 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12164 feature for adding extra space
12165 in a uniform fashion.
12166 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
12167 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12168 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
12169 equally between themselves.
12172 \begin_layout Standard
12173 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12176 \begin_layout Quote
12178 This is on the left side
12179 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12182 This is on the right
12185 \begin_layout Quote
12188 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12192 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12198 \begin_layout Quote
12201 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12205 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12209 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12215 \begin_layout Standard
12216 That was an example in the
12222 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12226 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12230 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12233 is one in a standard paragraph.
12234 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
12238 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12241 \begin_layout Standard
12242 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12245 \begin_inset space ~
12250 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
12253 \begin_layout Standard
12255 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12259 \begin_inset space ~
12265 \begin_layout Standard
12267 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12277 \begin_layout Standard
12279 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12283 \begin_inset space ~
12289 \begin_layout Standard
12291 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12295 \begin_inset space ~
12301 \begin_layout Standard
12303 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242277
12305 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242278
12309 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242369
12310 (= opened downwards)
12313 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12317 \begin_inset space ~
12323 \begin_layout Standard
12325 \change_deleted -712698321 1593242281
12327 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242282
12331 \change_inserted -712698321 1593242378
12335 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12339 \begin_inset space ~
12345 \begin_layout Standard
12346 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12354 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
12358 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
12360 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12361 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
12365 option in the space dialog.
12373 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12375 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12377 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12382 \begin_inset Index idx
12385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12394 \begin_layout Standard
12395 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12396 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12403 What is correct English?:
12404 \begin_inset Newline newline
12408 \begin_inset Newline newline
12412 \begin_inset space ~
12415 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12416 \begin_inset Newline newline
12420 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12431 \begin_inset Newline newline
12435 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12446 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12452 \begin_layout Standard
12454 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12455 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12459 \begin_inset space ~
12463 \begin_inset space ~
12467 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12471 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12473 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12474 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12478 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
12480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12484 \begin_inset space ~
12488 \begin_inset space ~
12492 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12495 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12504 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12505 That is why it is named
12506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12514 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12515 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
12519 \begin_layout Subsection
12521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12523 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12528 \begin_inset Index idx
12531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12540 \begin_layout Standard
12541 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
12543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12544 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12546 \begin_inset space ~
12552 There you find the following sizes:
12555 \begin_layout Standard
12568 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12569 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12574 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12576 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12577 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12579 \begin_inset space ~
12585 \begin_inset Index idx
12588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12589 Document ! Settings
12594 for the paragraph separation.
12595 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12604 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360527
12608 \begin_layout Standard
12610 \change_inserted -712698321 1593360570
12619 equal to the height, or half the height, of a line in the current font
12620 size including line spacing.
12625 \begin_layout Standard
12631 \begin_inset Index idx
12634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12640 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12641 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12646 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
12647 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
12656 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12665 s are described in section
12666 \begin_inset space ~
12670 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12672 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12681 If there are several
12685 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12686 You can therefore use
12690 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12693 \begin_layout Standard
12698 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12699 \begin_inset space ~
12703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12705 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12712 \begin_layout Standard
12713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12723 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
12724 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12736 \begin_layout Subsection
12737 Paragraph Alignment
12738 \begin_inset Index idx
12741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12742 Paragraph ! Alignment
12750 \begin_layout Standard
12751 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
12753 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
12756 dialog (toolbar button
12759 arg "layout-paragraph"
12763 There are five possibilities:
12766 \begin_layout Itemize
12774 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12780 \begin_layout Itemize
12788 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12794 \begin_layout Itemize
12802 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12808 \begin_layout Itemize
12816 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12822 \begin_layout Itemize
12830 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12836 \begin_layout Standard
12837 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12838 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12839 the left and right margins.
12840 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12843 \begin_layout Standard
12845 This paragraph is right aligned,
12848 \begin_layout Standard
12850 this one is centered,
12853 \begin_layout Standard
12855 this one is left aligned.
12858 \begin_layout Subsection
12860 \begin_inset Index idx
12863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12864 Page breaks ! Forced
12870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12872 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12879 \begin_layout Standard
12880 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12881 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12882 force a page break where you want one.
12883 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12884 is good at page breaking.
12885 Only if you use a lot of
12889 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12890 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12893 \begin_layout Standard
12894 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12895 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12899 have to change the page breaking.
12902 \begin_layout Standard
12903 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12905 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12908 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12910 \begin_inset space ~
12916 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12918 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12919 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12921 \begin_inset space ~
12926 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12928 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12929 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12932 \begin_layout Standard
12933 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12934 at the top of a page.
12935 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12937 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12938 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12939 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12941 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12943 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12947 to learn more about
12954 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12956 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12958 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12963 \begin_inset Index idx
12966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12967 Page breaks ! Clear
12975 \begin_layout Standard
12976 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12977 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12978 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12979 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12980 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12983 \begin_layout Standard
12984 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12987 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12989 \begin_inset space ~
12995 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12998 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13000 \begin_inset space ~
13004 \begin_inset space ~
13009 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
13010 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
13011 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706231
13015 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13017 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706295
13018 Suppressing Page Breaks
13021 \begin_inset Index idx
13024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13026 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706382
13030 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706335
13039 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005685
13041 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13043 name "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
13048 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706444
13052 \begin_layout Standard
13054 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13055 To discourage page break at
13056 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005668
13058 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706504
13059 certain point you can use
13063 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13065 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706512
13068 \SpecialChar menuseparator
13070 \change_inserted 5863208 1602706556
13077 \change_inserted 5863208 1602707015
13078 This is typically useful for paragraphs which should stay together or when
13079 you want to keep close the description for tables and pictures in case
13080 using floats or boxes is not appropriate.
13085 \begin_layout Subsection
13087 \begin_inset Index idx
13090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13099 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13106 \begin_layout Standard
13107 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
13109 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13111 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13112 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13114 \begin_inset space ~
13118 \begin_inset space ~
13126 arg "newline-insert newline"
13130 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13132 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13133 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13135 \begin_inset space ~
13139 \begin_inset space ~
13147 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13150 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
13152 This is useful to avoid
13153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13160 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13163 \begin_layout Standard
13164 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13165 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13167 very good at line breaking.
13168 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
13169 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
13170 \begin_inset space ~
13174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13176 reference "sec:Quote"
13181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13183 reference "sec:Verse"
13188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13190 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13197 \begin_layout Subsection
13199 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13201 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13206 \begin_inset Index idx
13209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13218 \begin_layout Standard
13220 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13231 \begin_layout Standard
13235 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13236 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13238 \begin_inset space ~
13243 you can insert horizontal lines.
13244 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
13245 of the current text line or the paragraph.
13246 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13249 \begin_layout Standard
13251 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13262 \begin_layout Section
13263 Characters and Symbols
13266 \begin_layout Standard
13267 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13268 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
13269 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13277 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13281 for information on how this is done.
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13285 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
13290 dialog via the menu
13292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13293 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13299 \begin_layout Standard
13300 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13308 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
13309 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13311 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13319 \begin_layout Section
13320 Fonts and Text Styles
13321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13323 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13330 \begin_layout Subsection
13332 \begin_inset Index idx
13335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13344 \begin_layout Standard
13345 There are two types of fonts:
13348 \begin_layout Description
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13354 \begin_inset Index idx
13357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13363 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13364 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13368 characters) in the font.
13369 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
13370 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13371 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
13372 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13373 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13374 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
13375 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13376 \begin_inset Newline newline
13379 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13380 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
13381 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
13382 sizes than at small ones.
13383 \begin_inset Newline newline
13397 \begin_inset space ~
13405 \begin_layout Description
13407 \begin_inset space ~
13411 \begin_inset Index idx
13414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13420 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
13421 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13422 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
13423 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13424 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
13425 image manipulation program.
13426 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
13427 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13428 \begin_inset space ~
13431 pixels high up to 34
13432 \begin_inset space ~
13435 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13436 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
13437 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
13439 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
13440 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
13441 \begin_inset Newline newline
13444 Bitmap fonts are named
13447 \begin_inset space ~
13452 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13455 \begin_layout Standard
13456 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
13457 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13458 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13459 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
13460 use scalable fonts.
13463 \begin_layout Standard
13464 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
13467 \begin_layout Standard
13468 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
13470 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757415
13472 \change_inserted 5863208 1598184810
13475 styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13476 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
13477 font, to emphasize text you use an
13478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13486 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13488 In \SpecialChar LyX
13489 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
13493 \begin_layout Subsection
13496 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13498 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13505 \begin_layout Standard
13506 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
13507 used its own fonts.
13508 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
13509 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13512 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13513 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
13514 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13515 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
13516 to a word processor.
13517 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
13518 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13519 files are very portable across
13520 different machines.
13521 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13522 has increased a lot
13523 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
13526 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
13528 \begin_inset space ~
13532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13534 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13539 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13540 code in the document
13541 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13544 \begin_layout Standard
13545 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13546 engines that are also able directly
13547 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13549 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13551 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13553 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
13554 that is installed on your system.
13555 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13558 \begin_layout Standard
13559 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13567 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13568 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
13576 \begin_layout Subsection
13577 Document Font and Font size
13578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13580 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13585 \begin_inset Index idx
13588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13595 \begin_inset Index idx
13598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13607 \begin_layout Standard
13608 You can set the document fonts in the
13610 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13614 \begin_inset Index idx
13617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13618 Document ! Settings
13628 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
13629 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
13632 \begin_inset space ~
13641 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
13643 \begin_inset space ~
13646 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13649 \begin_layout Standard
13654 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13655 This requires that you use
13667 as the output format, i.
13668 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13672 \begin_inset space \space{}
13675 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13676 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13677 installed (see section
13678 \begin_inset space ~
13682 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13684 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13689 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13691 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13692 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13694 \begin_inset space ~
13697 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
13698 cannot determine the family.
13699 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
13700 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13703 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
13706 \begin_layout Standard
13707 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13708 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
13713 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13719 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
13721 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413696
13723 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413700
13726 font encoding, this is
13727 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413733
13728 , depending on the document language,
13731 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413747
13732 either the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13740 \begin_inset space ~
13746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13756 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413754
13757 the standard \SpecialChar TeX
13759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13765 \begin_inset space ~
13771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13779 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413756
13783 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13795 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13800 European Computer Modern
13803 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13811 However, some classes set different default fonts.
13814 \begin_layout Standard
13819 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
13820 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
13824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13825 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
13828 \begin_inset space ~
13833 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
13839 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
13840 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
13843 \begin_layout Itemize
13847 \begin_inset space ~
13852 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
13865 \begin_inset space ~
13870 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13871 community in order to replace
13875 as the default font.
13876 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
13877 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
13880 \begin_inset space ~
13893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13894 One difference is improved kerning.
13902 \begin_layout Itemize
13903 If you do not like the look of
13911 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13916 \begin_inset space ~
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13932 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13933 \begin_inset space ~
13936 serif and typewriter fonts,
13940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13941 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13942 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13948 \begin_inset space ~
13957 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13958 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13962 \begin_inset space \space{}
13970 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13974 \begin_inset space \space{}
13980 \begin_inset space ~
13988 \begin_inset space ~
13998 but you can also select your own.
13999 \begin_inset Newline newline
14002 The differences between roman,
14005 \begin_inset space ~
14014 fonts are explained in section
14015 \begin_inset space ~
14019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14021 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14026 \begin_inset Newline newline
14032 \begin_inset space ~
14037 was originally designed for newspapers.
14038 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
14039 into the small newspaper columns.
14043 \begin_inset space ~
14048 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14051 \begin_layout Standard
14052 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14065 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14070 depends on the class you are using.
14071 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14074 \begin_layout Standard
14075 Note that the font size is the
14080 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14081 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
14082 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
14083 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14086 \begin_inset space ~
14092 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14093 \begin_inset space ~
14097 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14099 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14106 \begin_layout Standard
14110 \begin_inset space ~
14115 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
14117 \begin_inset space ~
14120 serif or typewriter.
14125 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
14135 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14138 \begin_layout Standard
14143 LaTeX font encoding
14145 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
14146 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14152 \begin_inset Index idx
14155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14163 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413571
14165 \begin_inset space ~
14169 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14171 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14178 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14179 Unless you have specific reasons, use
14180 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413471
14184 \change_inserted -712698321 1524413474
14192 \begin_layout Standard
14193 With some fonts, the checkboxes
14195 Use Old Style Figures
14199 Use True Small Caps
14202 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14205 Use Old Style Figures
14207 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
14209 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14217 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
14221 Use True Small Caps
14223 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
14224 of scaled capitals.
14225 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
14226 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14227 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000270
14231 \begin_layout Standard
14233 \change_inserted -712698321 1563000448
14234 Furthermore, with some fonts, you can add additional (comma-separated) options
14235 provided by the font package (or the
14239 package, if you use non-TeX fonts), into the
14244 This presupposes that you are familiar with the respective \SpecialChar LaTeX
14250 \begin_layout Standard
14255 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
14256 a font to display the script characters.
14260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14261 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14267 \begin_inset Index idx
14270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14277 So this has no effect for the document language
14293 \begin_layout Standard
14296 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14298 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via
14299 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14305 \begin_inset Index idx
14308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14310 packages ! microtype
14319 \begin_layout Standard
14322 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14324 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14329 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14330 macro, if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14336 instead of ligatures (--, ---) (see section
14337 \begin_inset space ~
14341 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14343 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14353 \begin_layout Standard
14354 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14358 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14366 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
14371 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14372 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14374 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14376 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14379 dialog, see section
14380 \begin_inset space ~
14384 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14386 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14398 \begin_layout Subsection
14402 \begin_layout Standard
14403 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14404 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
14406 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14407 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
14408 choose a math font in the dialog
14410 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14414 \begin_inset Index idx
14417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14418 Document ! Settings
14424 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14425 automatically selects a math font.
14426 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14427 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14436 \begin_inset space ~
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14447 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
14448 document font is available.
14451 \begin_layout Standard
14452 Note that the math font will not be used for
14456 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14462 or by the insertion of the command
14469 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14470 \begin_inset space ~
14474 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
14475 while the math characters do not.
14477 \begin_inset space ~
14480 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14483 \begin_inset space ~
14491 \begin_inset space ~
14496 in the document font settings.
14499 \begin_layout Standard
14500 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14501 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
14502 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14503 font (in most cases
14504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14510 \begin_inset space ~
14516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14519 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14520 variant of the document's class default font (in most
14522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14528 \begin_inset space ~
14534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14540 \begin_layout Subsection
14542 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757119
14544 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757120
14548 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595783
14550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14552 name "subsec:charstyles"
14559 \begin_inset Index idx
14562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14569 \begin_inset Index idx
14572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14581 \begin_layout Standard
14582 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
14583 automatically changes the
14584 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601052
14587 style for certain paragraph environments.
14589 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757169
14590 In this section, we will explain how the style of selected text passages
14592 This is where we meet the concept of
14598 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601099
14600 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601099
14604 \begin_layout Standard
14606 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595930
14611 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757160
14613 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757161
14626 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757189
14632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14635 e., available with all document classes.
14636 On top of that, some document classes and modules provide
14640 for specific purposes.
14641 We describe both types of text styles in a minute.
14644 \begin_layout Standard
14646 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757201
14647 Before we do that, though, allow us just a few words of what we mean by
14657 Traditional word processors used to focus on so-called
14661 : if you wanted to emphasize a word, you selected it and chose e.
14662 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14667 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14674 — you customized the
14679 Modern processors, \SpecialChar LyX
14680 among them, encourage the use of
14692 instead (although formal markup is still possible; see section
14693 \begin_inset space ~
14697 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14699 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14704 Rather than fiddling with
14708 , they encourage the use of
14712 , who are defined with regard to their function (e.
14713 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14717 \begin_inset Quotes els
14721 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14724 ), not their form (
14725 \begin_inset Quotes els
14729 \begin_inset Quotes ers
14733 There are many advantages of the semantic approach.
14734 To begin with, using functional categories keeps you thinking about why
14735 you are actually marking up, if your markup is consistent and systematic,
14736 and whether this particular markup makes sense.
14737 On a more practical level, it is easy to change the appearance if needed.
14738 Consider the case when you are writing a paper and set all proper names
14744 Now if the publisher requests to have names appear differently (e.
14745 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14748 g., in normal font, or ALL-CAPS), you would have to change any single occurrence.
14749 With a semantic markup (such as
14753 ; see below), you'd just need to change the definition of
14758 It's a ten second change (if you know how to change the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14760 Moreover, semantic markup even allows you to produce different versions
14761 of a document, using different markup semantics.
14764 \begin_layout Standard
14766 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757213
14767 With that in mind, we now turn to the semantic text styles that are provided
14768 by \SpecialChar LyX
14774 \begin_layout Subsubsection
14776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757220
14777 Builtin Text Styles
14778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
14780 name "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
14787 \begin_layout Standard
14789 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757226
14790 The two builtin text styles can be
14791 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596489
14795 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596491
14799 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596494
14800 both of these styles
14803 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14807 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006132
14809 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006135
14811 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596436
14817 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596045
14823 \begin_layout Standard
14828 style, do one of the following:
14831 \begin_layout Itemize
14832 click on the toolbar button
14841 \begin_layout Itemize
14842 use the key binding
14849 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596051
14853 \begin_layout Itemize
14855 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14859 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006154
14861 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006157
14863 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14871 arg "dialog-show character"
14875 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596318
14879 arg "dialog-show character"
14883 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006237
14884 as described in section
14885 \begin_inset space ~
14889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14891 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14896 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006263
14906 \begin_layout Standard
14908 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006284
14910 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006284
14914 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006286
14918 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006290
14920 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006291
14924 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006296
14932 style is already active, they deactivate it.
14935 \begin_layout Standard
14936 One typically uses the
14940 style for proper names.
14942 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14949 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14955 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598183
14959 \begin_layout Standard
14961 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598323
14966 is producing text in
14970 , but the definition can be changed.
14975 \begin_layout Standard
14977 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757229
14979 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757229
14987 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
14994 \begin_layout Itemize
14995 clicking on the toolbar button
15004 \begin_layout Itemize
15005 using the keybindings
15012 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596078
15016 \begin_layout Itemize
15018 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15022 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006353
15024 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006356
15026 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15034 arg "dialog-show character"
15038 \change_inserted -712698321 1525596340
15042 arg "dialog-show character"
15046 \change_deleted 630872221 1621007331
15047 as described in section
15048 \begin_inset space ~
15052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15054 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15059 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006374
15069 \begin_layout Standard
15074 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15076 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598370
15078 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598370
15081 packages use a different font
15082 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598396
15083 , and you can also customize it yourself by changing the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15089 \begin_layout Standard
15090 We've been using the
15094 style all over the place in this document.
15095 Here's one more example:
15098 \begin_layout Quotation
15102 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757231
15104 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757231
15110 \begin_layout Standard
15111 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15112 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15113 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
15114 the common tendency to overuse
15115 \change_deleted -712698321 1525757236
15117 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757236
15122 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186598
15124 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598419
15128 \begin_layout Standard
15130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757709
15131 In contrast to the custom text styles, the builtin styles are represented
15132 only as font changes and integrated in the
15140 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598525
15143 always reset to the default font using the key binding
15150 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598540
15152 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598540
15156 \change_deleted -712698321 1525596565
15159 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15161 \begin_inset space ~
15164 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15166 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15176 arg "dialog-show character"
15182 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15184 \change_deleted -712698321 1525598549
15190 arg "dialog-show character"
15194 \change_inserted -712698321 1525598549
15198 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15200 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756578
15202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15204 name "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
15211 \begin_layout Standard
15213 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757241
15214 Custom text styles can be provided by the document class, a module (see
15216 \begin_inset space ~
15220 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15222 reference "subsec:Modules"
15229 ), or local layout settings (see section
15230 \begin_inset space ~
15234 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15236 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
15241 As the two builtin styles, they provide
15245 markup for specific functions.
15246 For instance, \SpecialChar LyX
15251 module that provides, among other things, some custom text styles to markup
15261 \begin_inset Quotes els
15265 \begin_inset Quotes ers
15271 \begin_layout Standard
15273 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15274 These styles can be found, if available, in the
15276 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15278 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006495
15280 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757806
15286 \begin_layout Standard
15288 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757245
15289 For the purpose of demonstration, we have loaded in this document the optional
15294 that replicates and extends the two builtin styles.
15295 By example of the emphasized style, we can see the differences in look
15296 and feel (although the result in the typeset output is the same): while
15301 appears as normal font change, the custom text style
15302 \begin_inset Flex Emph
15305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15307 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599318
15315 appears as an inset, with a label below that identifies its semantics.
15316 This is the way all custom text styles look and feel like.
15317 For instance, the three others from the module we have loaded are:
15318 \begin_inset Flex Code
15321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15323 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599387
15332 \begin_inset Flex Strong
15335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15337 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599390
15346 \begin_inset Flex Noun
15349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15351 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599392
15360 Note that custom text styles might (as in the example) or might not emulate
15361 on screen their formal appearance.
15366 \begin_layout Subsection
15368 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599470
15370 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599472
15374 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599462
15380 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756524
15382 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756526
15388 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599485
15390 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599485
15394 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15396 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15401 \begin_inset Index idx
15404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15413 \begin_layout Standard
15414 There are always occasions when you will need to do some
15415 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599505
15418 fine-tuning; so \SpecialChar LyX
15420 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595143
15422 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595144
15426 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601741
15427 the properties of text passages
15428 \change_deleted -712698321 1525595163
15432 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
15433 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15434 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
15435 from ordinary dialog.
15436 \change_inserted -712698321 1525595231
15440 \begin_layout Standard
15442 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757255
15443 If there are no custom text styles provided by the document class or a module
15444 for this purpose (which is, as written above, generally the better way
15445 of handling such issues), you often find yourself wanting to quickly tweak
15446 the properties of the respective text passages.
15451 comes in as a last resort.
15456 \begin_layout Standard
15457 Before we document how to
15458 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599696
15459 use custom character style
15460 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599700
15461 tweak the text properties
15463 , we want to issue a warning yet again: Don't overuse
15464 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599715
15466 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599716
15470 \begin_inset Newline newline
15473 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
15474 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15477 \begin_layout Standard
15479 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599736
15480 use custom character styles
15481 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599739
15482 tweak text properties
15485 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599762
15488 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15490 \begin_inset space ~
15493 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15501 arg "dialog-show character"
15504 dialog or press the toolbar button
15507 arg "dialog-show character"
15512 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599782
15515 boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
15516 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599798
15518 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599796
15521 property that you can choose.
15522 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
15525 \begin_inset space ~
15530 , which keeps the current state of that property.
15532 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677079
15536 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677076
15538 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677077
15543 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15544 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
15545 environments all at once.
15548 \begin_layout Standard
15550 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599868
15552 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006625
15556 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006625
15558 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599869
15562 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006629
15564 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006628
15569 , and their options (in addition to
15572 \begin_inset space ~
15578 \change_deleted -712698321 1525677094
15582 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677096
15590 \begin_layout Labeling
15591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15605 The possible options are:
15609 \begin_layout Labeling
15610 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15615 This is the Roman font family.
15616 Normally a serif font.
15617 It's also the default family.
15627 \begin_layout Labeling
15628 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15632 \begin_inset space ~
15639 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15651 \begin_layout Labeling
15652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15659 This is the Typewriter font family.
15665 arg "font-typewriter"
15671 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607448
15675 \begin_layout Standard
15677 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607495
15678 The general differences of these families are:
15681 \begin_layout Itemize
15683 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607451
15688 fonts use characters with serifs.
15689 These are the small
15690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15697 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15698 The following example shows the difference:
15699 \begin_inset Newline newline
15703 \begin_inset Newline newline
15708 text without serifs
15711 \begin_inset Newline newline
15714 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15715 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15722 \begin_layout Itemize
15724 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15729 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15730 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15731 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15734 \begin_layout Itemize
15736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15749 font, which means every character has the same width; the
15750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 \begin_inset Newline newline
15771 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15776 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15789 \begin_inset Note Note
15792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15794 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607513
15795 For more on phantoms see section
15796 \begin_inset space ~
15800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15802 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15812 \begin_inset Newline newline
15821 \begin_layout Labeling
15822 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15827 This corresponds to the print weight.
15832 \begin_layout Labeling
15833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15838 This is the Medium font series.
15839 It's also the default series.
15842 \begin_layout Labeling
15843 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15850 This is the Bold font series.
15863 \begin_layout Labeling
15864 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15869 As the name implies.
15874 \begin_layout Labeling
15875 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15880 This is the Upright font shape.
15881 It's also the default shape.
15884 \begin_layout Labeling
15885 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15895 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599902
15900 \change_inserted -712698321 1525599902
15905 s the Italic font shape
15911 \begin_layout Labeling
15912 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15919 This is the Slanted font shape
15921 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15922 , this is different from italic).
15925 \begin_layout Labeling
15926 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15930 \begin_inset space ~
15937 This is the Small caps font shape
15944 \begin_layout Labeling
15945 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15947 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15952 Alters the text color.
15953 Note that not all DVI
15954 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599925
15956 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15957 viewers are able to display colors.
15961 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599939
15963 \begin_inset space ~
15967 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15970 , which means that the document default color set in
15972 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15973 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15979 \begin_inset space ~
15985 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599960
15987 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
15989 \change_deleted -712698321 1525599974
15991 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006688
16069 \begin_inset Index idx
16072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16079 \change_deleted 5863208 1598186626
16085 \begin_layout Labeling
16086 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16088 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16093 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16094 the language of the document.
16095 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16096 workarea in blue to
16097 indicate the change
16098 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600002
16099 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
16101 \change_deleted 630872221 1621006878
16103 \begin_inset Newline newline
16106 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16108 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16109 When using the spell checking (see section
16110 \begin_inset space ~
16114 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16116 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
16120 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
16121 \begin_inset Newline newline
16124 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
16126 Exclude from Spellchecking
16129 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
16130 \change_inserted -712698321 1525677618
16134 \begin_layout Labeling
16135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16140 Alters the size of the font.
16142 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600033
16144 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600034
16148 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600037
16151 numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually proportional to the
16152 document font size.
16153 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
16154 the details, but a general description of what
16160 \begin_layout Labeling
16161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16173 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16182 arg "font-size tiny"
16188 \begin_layout Labeling
16189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16197 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16210 arg "font-size scriptsize"
16216 \begin_layout Labeling
16217 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16229 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16238 arg "font-size footnotesize"
16244 \begin_layout Labeling
16245 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16266 arg "font-size small"
16272 \begin_layout Labeling
16273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16287 It's also the default size.
16291 arg "font-size normal"
16297 \begin_layout Labeling
16298 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16319 arg "font-size large"
16325 \begin_layout Labeling
16326 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16347 arg "font-size larger"
16353 \begin_layout Labeling
16354 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16375 arg "font-size largest"
16381 \begin_layout Labeling
16382 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16403 arg "font-size huge"
16409 \begin_layout Labeling
16410 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16431 arg "font-size giant"
16437 \begin_layout Labeling
16438 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16443 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
16444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16463 arg "font-size increase"
16469 \begin_layout Labeling
16470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16475 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
16476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16495 arg "font-size decrease"
16501 \begin_layout Standard
16506 : don't go crazy with this feature.
16507 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16509 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
16510 — use those instead.
16511 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16512 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006744
16517 \begin_layout Standard
16519 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006776
16520 Another combo box allows to tweak
16527 \begin_layout Labeling
16528 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16530 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16535 Alters the text color.
16536 Note that not all DVI viewers are able to display colors.
16541 , which means that the document default color set in
16543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16544 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16550 \begin_inset space ~
16555 is used, you can select
16632 \begin_inset Index idx
16635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16637 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006733
16650 \begin_layout Labeling
16651 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16653 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600062
16657 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600065
16663 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600102
16664 change a few other things at the character level
16665 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600112
16666 have text passages being underlined
16670 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600240
16671 Avoid using underlining if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter
16672 days, when you could not change fonts.
16673 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16674 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16675 because some people
16679 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16686 \begin_layout Labeling
16687 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16689 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600074
16696 This is text with emphasize on
16699 This might seem like the same as
16703 , but it is actually a bit different.
16709 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
16711 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16712 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600322
16716 \begin_layout Labeling
16717 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16719 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600337
16724 Don't use underlining.
16729 \begin_layout Labeling
16730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16732 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600192
16736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600193
16744 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600212
16746 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600209
16755 arg "font-underline"
16761 \begin_inset Newline newline
16765 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600236
16768 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16769 when you could not change fonts.
16770 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16771 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16772 because some people
16776 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16781 \begin_layout Labeling
16782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16786 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600261
16788 \begin_inset space ~
16797 This is text with Double under
16798 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600270
16800 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600271
16809 arg "font-underunderline"
16813 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600282
16815 \begin_inset Newline newline
16818 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
16819 about double underbar
16824 \begin_layout Labeling
16825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16829 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600285
16831 \begin_inset space ~
16840 This is text with Wavy under
16841 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600294
16843 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600295
16852 arg "font-underwave"
16856 \begin_inset Newline newline
16859 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16860 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16861 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600130
16866 \begin_layout Labeling
16867 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16869 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600169
16874 lets you strike-through text passages in two ways:
16880 \begin_layout Labeling
16881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16883 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600364
16888 Don't use strikethrough.
16891 \begin_layout Labeling
16892 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16896 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600378
16898 \begin_inset space ~
16902 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600378
16910 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600382
16912 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601925
16913 Single strikethrough
16921 arg "font-strikeout"
16925 \begin_inset Newline newline
16928 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
16929 changed in the meantime.
16932 \begin_layout Labeling
16933 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16935 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600394
16939 \begin_inset space ~
16943 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600397
16945 \begin_inset space ~
16949 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600398
16957 \change_inserted -712698321 1525601941
16959 \change_deleted -712698321 1525601943
16965 \begin_inset Newline newline
16968 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16972 \begin_layout Standard
16974 \change_inserted 630872221 1621007597
16975 A drop-down menu allows to change the parameters for the
16978 \begin_layout Labeling
16979 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16981 \change_inserted 630872221 1621006898
16986 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
16987 the language of the document.
16988 Text marked in this way will be underlined in the \SpecialChar LyX
16989 workarea in blue to
16990 indicate the change.
16991 \begin_inset Newline newline
16994 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
16996 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
16997 When using the spell checking (see section
16998 \begin_inset space ~
17002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17004 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
17008 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
17009 \begin_inset Newline newline
17012 If you do not want text passages to be spellchecked, activate
17014 Exclude from Spellchecking
17017 Passages marked like this will still be hyphenated correctly.
17020 \begin_layout Standard
17022 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17023 In addition to all the formal markup described above, the dialog also provides
17024 you access to the two builtin semantic text styles (see section
17025 \begin_inset space ~
17029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17031 reference "subsec:Builtin-Character-Styles"
17036 \change_inserted 630872221 1621181776
17040 \change_inserted -712698321 1525757268
17046 \begin_layout Itemize
17048 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600579
17055 This is text with emphasize on
17060 \begin_layout Itemize
17064 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600548
17071 This is text with Noun on.
17073 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600637
17080 , this is a logical attribute.
17081 Normally it's equivalent to
17084 \begin_inset space ~
17094 \begin_layout Standard
17095 So you have a huge number of combinations to
17096 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600660
17098 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600660
17103 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600674
17104 chosen a new character style
17105 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600725
17106 applied a text property
17109 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600703
17112 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
17114 \begin_inset space ~
17117 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
17125 arg "dialog-show character"
17131 arg "dialog-show character"
17134 ) dialog, the settings are
17135 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600733
17139 You can activate the
17140 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600738
17142 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600745
17143 last applied properties
17145 by using the toolbar button
17148 arg "textstyle-apply"
17152 The button lets you apply
17153 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600766
17154 your custom character style
17155 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600778
17158 even when the dialog isn't visible.
17160 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905101
17161 A press on the button will apply the most recent setting again, a press
17162 on the down-arrow will open a menu with the (max.
17163 20) most recently applied settings, from which you can select one.
17168 \begin_layout Standard
17169 To completely reset the
17170 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600787
17172 \change_inserted -712698321 1525600823
17173 text properties of a selection
17175 to the default, use
17176 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917704
17178 \change_deleted -712698321 1545917700
17188 \change_inserted -712698321 1545917733
17193 from the menu of the toolbar button
17196 arg "textstyle-apply"
17203 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600803
17204 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose
17205 you just set the shape to
17206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17224 \begin_inset space ~
17238 \begin_layout Standard
17240 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17241 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
17249 \begin_inset space ~
17261 \begin_layout Itemize
17263 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17273 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17276 font, which means every character has the same width; the
17277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17294 \begin_inset Newline newline
17298 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
17301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17312 \begin_inset Note Note
17315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17316 For more on phantoms see section
17317 \begin_inset space ~
17321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17323 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
17333 \begin_inset Newline newline
17339 \begin_layout Itemize
17341 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17346 fonts use characters with serifs.
17347 These are the small
17348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17355 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
17356 The following example shows the difference:
17357 \begin_inset Newline newline
17361 \begin_inset Newline newline
17366 text without serifs
17369 \begin_inset Newline newline
17372 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
17373 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
17380 \begin_layout Itemize
17382 \change_deleted -712698321 1525607419
17387 is not recommended for use as a base type.
17388 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
17389 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
17394 \begin_layout Standard
17396 \change_deleted -712698321 1525600873
17397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17404 refers to applying or removing font properties.
17405 When a property is marked for toggling in the
17408 \begin_inset space ~
17413 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
17414 the property to be removed.
17415 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
17416 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
17417 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
17420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17428 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17432 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17435 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
17436 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
17437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17444 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
17448 \begin_inset space ~
17453 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
17456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17464 If you, for example, set
17465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17477 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17483 \begin_inset space ~
17488 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
17490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17497 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
17502 \begin_layout Standard
17504 \change_inserted -712698321 1525607667
17507 with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts! They are, more
17508 often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
17511 \begin_layout Section
17512 Printing and Previewing
17515 \begin_layout Subsection
17519 \begin_layout Standard
17520 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
17521 using \SpecialChar LyX
17522 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
17523 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
17524 goes on behind-the-scenes.
17525 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
17527 Additional Features
17532 \begin_layout Standard
17534 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
17537 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
17538 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
17539 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
17542 is what you use to do your actual writing.
17543 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
17544 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17545 to turn your writing into printable output.
17546 This happens in two stages:
17549 \begin_layout Enumerate
17550 First, \SpecialChar LyX
17551 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
17553 a file with the extension,
17554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17568 \begin_layout Enumerate
17569 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
17570 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17571 to use the commands in the
17575 file to produce printable output.
17578 \begin_layout Subsection
17579 Output file formats
17580 \begin_inset Index idx
17583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17590 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17592 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
17599 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17601 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337594
17603 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337596
17607 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337574
17611 \begin_inset Index idx
17614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17616 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337607
17618 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337612
17629 \begin_layout Standard
17630 This file type has the extension
17631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17643 It contains your document as plain text
17644 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337643
17646 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337647
17647 following the rules of the
17648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17651 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
17652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17660 \begin_layout Standard
17661 You can export your document to
17662 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337684
17664 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337686
17669 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17670 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17672 \begin_inset space ~
17678 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
17679 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
17680 bibliography (section
17681 \begin_inset space ~
17685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17687 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
17692 If your document includes such material, use
17694 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17695 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17697 \begin_inset space ~
17701 \begin_inset space ~
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17713 \begin_inset space ~
17717 \begin_inset space ~
17723 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
17724 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to
17725 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337720
17727 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337722
17733 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17736 \begin_inset Index idx
17739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17740 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
17749 \begin_layout Standard
17750 This file type has the extension
17751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17762 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17765 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
17766 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
17767 -Errors or to process it manually
17768 with console commands.
17769 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
17770 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
17771 's temporary directory whenever you
17772 view or export your document.
17775 \begin_layout Standard
17776 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
17777 -file using the menu
17779 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17780 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17784 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
17785 export variants are explained in section
17786 \begin_inset space ~
17790 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17792 reference "subsec:Export"
17799 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17801 \begin_inset Index idx
17804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17813 \begin_layout Standard
17814 This file type has the extension
17815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17835 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
17836 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
17837 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
17841 \begin_layout Standard
17842 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
17843 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
17844 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
17845 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
17846 when you view the DVI.
17847 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
17850 \begin_layout Standard
17851 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17853 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17854 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17859 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17860 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17862 \begin_inset space ~
17868 The latter option uses the program
17870 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17876 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17879 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
17880 font access (see section
17881 \begin_inset space ~
17885 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17887 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17892 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17893 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
17898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17900 \begin_inset Index idx
17903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17904 File formats ! PostScript
17912 \begin_layout Standard
17913 This file type has the extension
17914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17926 PostScript was developed by the company
17930 as a printer language.
17931 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
17933 PostScript can be seen as a
17934 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17937 programming language
17938 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17941 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17946 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17953 \begin_inset Index idx
17956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17958 packages ! pstricks
17968 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17971 \begin_layout Standard
17972 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17973 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17976 Encapsulated PostScript
17977 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17980 (EPS, file extension
17981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17993 As \SpecialChar LyX
17994 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
17995 convert them in the background to EPS.
17996 If, for example, you have 50
17997 \begin_inset space ~
18000 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
18002 \begin_inset space ~
18005 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
18006 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
18008 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
18009 EPS to avoid this problem.
18012 \begin_layout Standard
18013 You can export to PostScript using the menu
18015 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18016 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18022 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18024 \begin_inset Index idx
18027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18034 \begin_inset Index idx
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18046 \begin_layout Standard
18047 This file type has the extension
18048 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18061 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18064 Portable Document Format
18065 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18072 was derived from PostScript.
18073 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
18075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18082 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
18083 looks exactly the same.
18086 \begin_layout Standard
18087 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
18088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18091 Joint Photographic Experts Group
18092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18095 (JPG, file extension
18096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18116 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18123 Portable Network Graphics
18124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18127 (PNG, file extension
18128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18140 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
18141 converts them in the
18142 background to one of these formats.
18143 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
18144 will slow down your workflow.
18145 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
18148 \begin_layout Standard
18149 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
18151 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18157 \begin_layout Description
18159 \begin_inset space ~
18162 (pdflatex) This uses the program
18166 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18169 \begin_layout Description
18171 \begin_inset space ~
18178 ) This uses the program
18180 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18183 which converts your file directly to PDF.
18186 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18189 is a new engine, derived from
18193 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
18194 access (see section
18195 \begin_inset space ~
18199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18201 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18206 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
18207 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
18212 \begin_layout Description
18214 \begin_inset space ~
18221 ) This uses the program
18226 that converts your file directly to PDF.
18232 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
18233 font access (see section
18234 \begin_inset space ~
18238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18240 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
18245 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
18246 vertically written Japanese.
18249 \begin_layout Description
18251 \begin_inset space ~
18254 (cropped) This is the same as
18257 \begin_inset space ~
18262 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
18263 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
18264 to generate good-looking
18265 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
18268 \begin_layout Description
18270 \begin_inset space ~
18273 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
18277 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
18281 \begin_layout Description
18283 \begin_inset space ~
18286 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
18290 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
18291 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
18295 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
18296 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
18299 \begin_layout Standard
18303 \begin_inset space ~
18312 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
18313 works without problems.
18314 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
18315 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
18319 \begin_inset space ~
18327 \begin_inset space ~
18332 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
18340 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18342 \begin_inset Index idx
18345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18346 FileFormats ! XHTML
18352 \begin_inset Index idx
18355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18364 \begin_layout Standard
18365 This file type has the extension
18366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18378 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
18379 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
18380 When \SpecialChar LyX
18381 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
18382 suitable for the purpose.
18383 For the math output you can choose in the menu
18385 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18386 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18389 between different formats, which are described in section
18391 Math Output in XHTML
18396 \begin_inset space ~
18404 \begin_layout Standard
18405 XHTML output remains
18406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18413 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
18414 features are supported yet.
18418 and the World Wide Web
18422 Additional Features
18424 manual, for more information.
18427 \begin_layout Standard
18428 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
18430 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18431 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18437 \begin_layout Subsection
18439 \begin_inset Index idx
18442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18451 \begin_layout Standard
18452 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
18453 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
18462 or use the toolbar button
18469 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
18470 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
18471 \begin_inset space ~
18475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18477 reference "sec:File-Formats"
18481 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
18483 \begin_inset space ~
18487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18489 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
18494 Further output formats can be selected via
18496 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18497 View (Other Formats)
18499 or the toolbar button
18508 \begin_layout Standard
18509 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
18510 viewer window using the menu
18512 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18517 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18518 Update (Other Formats)
18523 \begin_layout Standard
18524 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
18527 To have a real output, export your document.
18530 \begin_layout Section
18531 A few Words about Typography
18532 \begin_inset Index idx
18535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18544 \begin_layout Subsection
18545 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
18546 \begin_inset Index idx
18549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18556 \begin_inset Index idx
18559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18569 In \SpecialChar LyX
18571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18582 symbol comes in four variants: the
18599 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18605 \begin_layout Standard
18606 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18616 height_special "totalheight"
18621 backgroundcolor "none"
18624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18625 \begin_inset Tabular
18626 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
18627 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18628 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
18629 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18630 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18631 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18632 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
18653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18660 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18661 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18700 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18701 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18723 system key combination
18727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18728 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
18731 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18735 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18740 and the em dash with
18743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18747 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18756 is the Mac label for the right
18766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18779 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18780 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18802 system key combination or
18803 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18807 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18817 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18830 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18869 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18875 \begin_layout Standard
18876 Dashes can also be inserted with
18878 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18880 \begin_inset space ~
18883 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18891 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
18892 and 2014 for the en dash).
18895 \begin_layout Standard
18896 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
18897 mode and has a length of its own.
18898 Here are some examples:
18901 \begin_layout Enumerate
18902 line- and page-breaks
18903 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18913 \begin_layout Enumerate
18915 \begin_inset space ~
18919 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18929 \begin_layout Enumerate
18930 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
18931 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18941 \begin_layout Enumerate
18942 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18946 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18956 \begin_layout Standard
18958 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18960 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18961 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18969 \begin_layout Subsection
18970 Dashes and Line Breaks
18971 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18973 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18980 \begin_layout Standard
18981 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use
18982 case and locale, e.
18983 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18989 \begin_layout Itemize
18990 In English, line breaks are generally allowed after the dash, but no line
18991 break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18994 \begin_layout Itemize
18995 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
18999 \begin_layout Itemize
19000 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
19001 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
19004 \begin_layout Standard
19005 By default, dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
19006 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19017 allows line breaks after hyphens
19018 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782973
19020 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782983
19023 en-dashes and em-dashes.
19026 \begin_layout Enumerate
19027 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
19028 \begin_inset space ~
19031 – common in British English and generally recommended by
19033 The Elements of Typographic Style
19036 \begin_inset space ~
19039 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
19042 \begin_layout Enumerate
19043 Unwanted line breaks
19048 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782702
19050 \change_deleted -1402925745 1558782715
19053 be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
19057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19060 Prevent Hyphenation
19065 \begin_inset space ~
19081 in \SpecialChar TeX
19083 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782753
19084 , a protected space does not suffice
19088 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782332
19093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19095 \change_inserted -1402925745 1558782431
19096 It is generally recommended to set the correct language for text parts not
19097 in the document language.
19098 We don't do this here to prevent a dependency on LaTeX support for French
19112 \begin_layout Itemize
19114 \begin_inset space ~
19118 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19128 height_special "totalheight"
19133 backgroundcolor "none"
19136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19145 \begin_layout Itemize
19147 \begin_inset Box Frameless
19157 height_special "totalheight"
19162 backgroundcolor "none"
19165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19167 \begin_inset space ~
19175 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19176 \begin_inset space ~
19179 – sont très utiles.
19182 \begin_layout Itemize
19187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19196 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
19200 \begin_layout Standard
19201 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
19202 \begin_inset space ~
19205 – in contrast to an overfull line
19206 \begin_inset space ~
19209 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19213 \begin_layout Standard
19214 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes, you can select
19217 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19218 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19219 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19220 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19225 \begin_layout Enumerate
19226 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
19227 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox
19228 or \SpecialChar TeX
19234 \begin_layout Itemize
19236 \begin_inset space ~
19239 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
19240 \begin_inset space ~
19243 – sont très utiles.
19247 \begin_layout Enumerate
19248 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
19249 \begin_inset Newline newline
19254 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19255 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19257 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913043
19259 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913043
19261 \begin_inset space ~
19267 \change_deleted 1675569489 1580913068
19269 \change_inserted 1675569489 1580913068
19271 \begin_inset space ~
19282 \begin_layout Itemize
19283 Em-dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19284 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
19285 should be followed by
19286 a line break opportunity.
19289 \begin_layout Standard
19290 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
19291 \begin_inset space ~
19295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19297 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19308 \begin_layout Enumerate
19309 With this setting, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19310 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em
19311 or en dashes (see section
19312 \begin_inset space ~
19316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19318 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
19328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19329 Changes and Backwards Compatibility
19332 \begin_layout Standard
19333 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
19335 \begin_inset space ~
19338 2.1, consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged
19339 to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
19341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19345 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19348 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters
19349 are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
19357 \begin_layout Standard
19358 Since \SpecialChar LyX
19360 \begin_inset space ~
19363 2.2, consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19365 prevents ligation to dashes.
19367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19374 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters
19379 font); typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately
19380 after the input (unless the current text font is
19388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19389 The behavior was changed since
19390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19405 in PDF, Postscript, and DVI output.
19406 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output
19407 as non-breakable dashes.
19408 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
19416 \begin_layout Standard
19419 \begin_inset space ~
19427 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
19429 \begin_inset space ~
19432 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
19435 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19436 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
19437 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
19438 Disallow line breaks after dashes
19440 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
19444 If you used both literal and
19445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19452 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
19454 \begin_inset space ~
19457 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
19458 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
19461 \begin_layout Subsection
19463 \begin_inset Index idx
19466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19473 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19475 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
19482 \begin_layout Standard
19483 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
19484 but automatically in the output.
19485 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
19491 \begin_inset Index idx
19494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19501 following the rules of the document language.
19503 does not hyphenate text in the
19507 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
19510 \begin_layout Standard
19512 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
19516 font and with unusual constructs, like
19517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19525 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
19526 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
19527 This is done with the menu
19529 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19530 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19532 \begin_inset space ~
19538 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
19540 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19544 \begin_layout Standard
19545 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
19546 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
19548 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19557 would then see the hyphen
19558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19565 as a line break possibility.
19566 A line break at this point would look ugly.
19567 To prevent the shortcut from being broken, you can use a protected hyphen
19570 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19571 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
19574 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
19576 Prevent Hyphenation
19581 \begin_inset space ~
19589 \begin_layout Subsection
19591 \begin_inset Index idx
19594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19604 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
19605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19607 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
19614 \begin_layout Standard
19615 When \SpecialChar LyX
19616 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
19617 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
19619 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
19622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19625 appropriate amount of space.
19626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19629 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
19631 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
19632 gets after another word.
19635 \begin_layout Standard
19636 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
19637 not work in all cases.
19639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19650 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
19651 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
19654 \begin_layout Standard
19655 Here are some examples of
19659 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
19662 \begin_layout Itemize
19667 \begin_layout Itemize
19672 \begin_layout Standard
19673 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
19676 \begin_layout Itemize
19678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19682 this is too much space!
19685 \begin_layout Itemize
19690 \begin_layout Standard
19691 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
19694 \begin_layout Standard
19695 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
19698 \begin_layout Enumerate
19702 \begin_inset space ~
19707 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19708 \begin_inset space ~
19712 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19714 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19719 \begin_inset Index idx
19722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19723 Spaces ! inter-word
19731 \begin_layout Enumerate
19735 \begin_inset space ~
19740 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19741 \begin_inset space ~
19745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19747 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19752 \begin_inset Index idx
19755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19764 \begin_layout Enumerate
19768 \begin_inset space ~
19772 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19783 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19785 \begin_inset space ~
19790 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19791 This function is also bound to
19794 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19800 \begin_layout Standard
19801 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
19804 \begin_layout Itemize
19806 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19810 \begin_inset space \space{}
19813 this is too much space!
19816 \begin_layout Itemize
19817 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19821 \begin_layout Standard
19822 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19823 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19825 will take care of this.
19828 \begin_layout Standard
19829 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19833 \begin_inset space ~
19839 feature described in the section
19841 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19846 Additional Features
19851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19853 \begin_inset Index idx
19856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19857 Typography ! Quotation marks
19863 \begin_inset Index idx
19866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19867 Quotation marks | see
19871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19897 \begin_layout Standard
19899 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19900 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
19901 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
19903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19911 The keyboard character,
19915 , generates this automatically.
19918 \begin_layout Standard
19919 You can specify what character the
19923 key produces by using the submenu
19929 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19933 \begin_inset Index idx
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19937 Document ! Settings
19942 dialog and switching the
19946 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19947 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19949 \change_deleted -712698321 1606924196
19951 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924196
19955 \begin_inset space ~
19961 \begin_layout Labeling
19962 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19974 \begin_inset space ~
19978 \begin_inset space ~
19982 \begin_inset Quotes els
19986 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20000 \begin_inset Quotes els
20004 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20007 quotation marks (as common, e.
20008 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20014 \begin_layout Labeling
20015 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20018 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20022 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20026 \begin_inset space ~
20030 \begin_inset space ~
20034 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20038 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20044 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20048 \begin_inset Quotes sld
20052 \begin_inset Quotes sls
20056 \begin_inset Quotes srs
20059 quotation marks (as common, e.
20060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20066 \begin_layout Labeling
20067 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20070 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20074 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20078 \begin_inset space ~
20082 \begin_inset space ~
20086 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20090 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20096 \begin_inset Quotes gld
20100 \begin_inset Quotes grd
20104 \begin_inset Quotes gls
20108 \begin_inset Quotes grs
20111 quotation marks (as common, e.
20112 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20118 \begin_layout Labeling
20119 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20122 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20126 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20130 \begin_inset space ~
20134 \begin_inset space ~
20138 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20142 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20148 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20152 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20156 \begin_inset Quotes pls
20160 \begin_inset Quotes prs
20163 quotation marks (as common, e.
20164 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20170 \begin_layout Labeling
20171 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20174 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20178 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20182 \begin_inset space ~
20186 \begin_inset space ~
20190 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20194 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20200 \begin_inset Quotes cld
20204 \begin_inset Quotes crd
20208 \begin_inset Quotes cls
20212 \begin_inset Quotes crs
20215 quotation marks (as common, e.
20216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20219 g., in Switzerland)
20222 \begin_layout Labeling
20223 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20226 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20230 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20234 \begin_inset space ~
20238 \begin_inset space ~
20242 \begin_inset Quotes als
20246 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20252 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20256 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20260 \begin_inset Quotes als
20264 \begin_inset Quotes ars
20267 quotation marks (as common, e.
20268 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20274 \begin_layout Labeling
20275 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20278 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20282 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20286 \begin_inset space ~
20290 \begin_inset space ~
20294 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20298 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20304 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20308 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
20312 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20316 \begin_inset Quotes qls
20319 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
20322 \begin_layout Labeling
20323 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20326 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20330 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20334 \begin_inset space ~
20338 \begin_inset space ~
20342 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20346 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20352 \begin_inset Quotes bld
20356 \begin_inset Quotes brd
20360 \begin_inset Quotes bls
20364 \begin_inset Quotes brs
20367 quotation marks (as common, e.
20368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20371 g., in Great Britain)
20374 \begin_layout Labeling
20375 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20378 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20382 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20386 \begin_inset space ~
20390 \begin_inset space ~
20394 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20398 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20404 \begin_inset Quotes fld
20408 \begin_inset Quotes frd
20412 \begin_inset Quotes fls
20416 \begin_inset Quotes frs
20419 quotation marks (as common, e.
20420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20426 \begin_layout Labeling
20427 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20430 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20434 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20438 \begin_inset space ~
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20446 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20450 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20456 \begin_inset Quotes ild
20460 \begin_inset Quotes ird
20464 \begin_inset Quotes ils
20468 \begin_inset Quotes irs
20471 quotation marks (another style common in France)
20475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
20477 since these look identical to the inner marks.
20478 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
20479 the inner marks differ).
20487 \begin_layout Labeling
20488 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20491 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20495 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20499 \begin_inset space ~
20503 \begin_inset space ~
20507 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20511 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20517 \begin_inset Quotes rld
20521 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
20525 \begin_inset Quotes rls
20529 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
20532 quotation marks (as common, e.
20533 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20539 \begin_layout Labeling
20540 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20543 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20547 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20551 \begin_inset space ~
20555 \begin_inset space ~
20559 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20563 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20569 \begin_inset Quotes wld
20573 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
20577 \begin_inset Quotes wls
20581 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
20584 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
20585 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924211
20589 \begin_layout Labeling
20590 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20592 \change_inserted -712698321 1606924279
20595 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20599 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20603 \begin_inset space ~
20607 \begin_inset space ~
20611 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20615 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20623 \begin_inset Quotes pld
20631 \begin_inset Quotes prd
20639 \begin_inset Quotes ald
20647 \begin_inset Quotes ard
20652 quotation marks (as common in Hungary)
20657 \begin_layout Labeling
20658 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20659 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20667 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20673 \begin_inset space ~
20677 \begin_inset space ~
20683 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20691 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20695 \begin_inset Quotes jld
20699 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
20703 \begin_inset Quotes jls
20707 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
20710 quotation marks (as common, e.
20711 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20720 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338376
20721 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20723 name "fn:cjk-quotes"
20729 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20730 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20738 \begin_layout Labeling
20739 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
20740 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20748 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20754 \begin_inset space ~
20758 \begin_inset space ~
20764 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20772 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20776 \begin_inset Quotes kld
20780 \begin_inset Quotes krd
20784 \begin_inset Quotes kls
20788 \begin_inset Quotes krs
20791 quotation marks (as common, e.
20792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20795 g., in North Korea and China)
20796 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20798 \begin_inset script superscript
20800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338410
20803 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20805 reference "fn:cjk-quotes"
20820 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338417
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20826 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
20827 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
20837 \begin_layout Standard
20838 Inner quotation marks
20842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
20844 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
20845 case (and specifically the British style shows that
20846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20853 does not necessarily mean
20854 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20862 This is why we call them
20863 \begin_inset Quotes els
20867 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20883 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
20885 \begin_inset Quotes els
20889 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20892 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20895 arg "quote-insert inner"
20900 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20906 \begin_layout Standard
20907 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20908 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
20909 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
20910 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20911 If you check the setting
20913 Use dynamic quotation marks
20917 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20918 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20921 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20922 they appear in a special color).
20923 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20924 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
20926 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20929 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
20932 \begin_layout Standard
20933 Individual quotation marks (i.
20934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20937 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
20938 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
20942 \begin_layout Subsection
20944 \begin_inset Index idx
20947 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20948 Typography ! Ligatures
20954 \begin_inset Index idx
20957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20988 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20995 \begin_layout Standard
20996 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
20997 print them as single characters.
20998 These groups are known as
21003 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
21004 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
21006 Here are the standard ligatures:
21009 \begin_layout Itemize
21013 \begin_layout Itemize
21017 \begin_layout Itemize
21021 \begin_layout Itemize
21025 \begin_layout Itemize
21029 \begin_layout Standard
21030 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
21033 \begin_layout Standard
21034 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
21035 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
21036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21043 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
21044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21059 To break a ligature, use
21061 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21062 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21064 \begin_inset space ~
21071 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21082 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21099 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
21101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21107 \begin_layout Subsection
21109 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
21111 \begin_inset Index idx
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 \begin_layout Standard
21127 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21128 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
21132 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
21135 \begin_layout Description
21137 The name of the game.
21140 \begin_layout Description
21142 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
21146 \begin_layout Description
21148 The \SpecialChar TeX
21149 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
21153 \begin_layout Description
21154 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
21155 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21159 \begin_layout Standard
21160 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21166 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
21170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21174 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
21175 world to give programs geek version numbers.
21176 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
21177 converges to the number
21178 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
21181 : The actual version is
21182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21187 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21190 , the previous one was
21191 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21196 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21202 \begin_layout Subsection
21204 \begin_inset Index idx
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21216 \begin_layout Standard
21217 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
21218 space between two words.
21219 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
21222 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21226 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21229 for units use the menu
21231 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21232 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
21234 \begin_inset space ~
21242 arg "space-insert thin"
21248 \begin_layout Standard
21249 Here is an example to show the differences:
21252 \begin_layout Standard
21253 \begin_inset Tabular
21254 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
21255 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21256 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21257 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21264 \begin_inset space ~
21268 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21280 space between number and unit
21287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21292 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
21296 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
21304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
21307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 half space between number and unit
21321 \begin_layout Subsection
21323 \begin_inset Index idx
21326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21327 Typography ! Widows and orphans
21335 \begin_layout Standard
21336 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
21338 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
21339 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
21340 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
21341 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
21342 These bits of text became known as
21353 \begin_layout Standard
21354 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
21355 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
21356 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
21357 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
21358 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
21359 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
21360 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
21361 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
21362 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
21363 \begin_inset Newline newline
21371 \begin_inset Newline newline
21379 \begin_inset Newline newline
21382 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
21383 preamble of your document to avoid them.
21384 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
21386 \begin_inset space ~
21390 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21392 key "latexcompanion"
21398 \begin_inset space ~
21402 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
21409 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
21410 's page break mechanism.
21413 \begin_layout Chapter
21414 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
21415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21417 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
21424 \begin_layout Standard
21425 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
21428 \begin_inset space ~
21434 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
21437 \begin_layout Section
21439 \begin_inset Index idx
21442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21458 \begin_layout Standard
21460 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
21463 \begin_layout Description
21466 \begin_inset space ~
21469 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
21470 \begin_inset Newline newline
21474 \begin_inset Note Note
21477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
21486 \begin_layout Description
21487 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
21488 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
21489 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
21492 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
21493 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
21495 \begin_inset space ~
21501 \begin_inset Newline newline
21505 \begin_inset Note Comment
21508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21509 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
21518 \begin_layout Description
21520 \begin_inset space ~
21523 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
21524 set in the document settings under
21526 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
21528 \begin_inset space ~
21534 \begin_inset Newline newline
21538 \begin_inset Newline newline
21542 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
21545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21551 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
21552 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
21557 of a comment that appears in the output.
21563 \begin_inset Newline newline
21567 \begin_inset Newline newline
21570 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
21573 \begin_layout Standard
21574 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
21582 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21586 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
21589 \begin_layout Section
21591 \begin_inset Index idx
21594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21601 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21603 name "sec:Footnotes"
21610 \begin_layout Standard
21612 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
21615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21618 or the toolbar button
21621 arg "footnote-insert"
21633 \begin_inset Graphics
21634 filename clipart/footnote.png
21643 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21644 's representation of your footnote.
21654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21673 label, the box will
21677 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
21678 Clicking on the box label again will close
21691 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
21692 and click on the footnote
21707 \begin_layout Standard
21708 Here is an example footnote:
21716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21717 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
21725 \begin_layout Standard
21726 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
21727 position where the footnote box is placed.
21728 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
21729 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
21730 according to the document class.
21732 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
21733 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
21739 ey are described in the
21742 \begin_inset space ~
21750 \begin_layout Section
21752 \begin_inset Index idx
21755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21762 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21764 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21771 \begin_layout Standard
21772 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21774 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21776 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21778 \begin_inset space ~
21783 or the toolbar button
21786 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21809 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21812 appearing within your text.
21813 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21814 's representation of your margin
21823 \begin_layout Standard
21824 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21828 \begin_inset Marginal
21831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 This is a marginal note.
21841 \begin_layout Standard
21842 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21843 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
21844 pages, right on odd pages.
21847 \begin_layout Standard
21848 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21851 \begin_inset space ~
21859 \begin_inset space ~
21867 \begin_layout Section
21868 Graphics and Images
21869 \begin_inset Index idx
21872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21879 \begin_inset Index idx
21882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21889 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21891 name "sec:Graphics"
21898 \begin_layout Standard
21899 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
21900 you want and click on the toolbar icon
21903 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21908 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21912 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21915 \begin_layout Standard
21916 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21921 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21922 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
21924 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21925 \begin_inset space ~
21929 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21931 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21938 \begin_layout Standard
21943 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
21944 of the image in the output.
21945 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21949 \begin_inset space ~
21953 \begin_inset space ~
21962 \begin_inset space ~
21966 \begin_inset space ~
21970 \begin_inset space ~
21975 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21976 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
21984 \begin_layout Standard
21988 \begin_inset space ~
21992 \begin_inset space ~
21997 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21998 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
22000 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
22005 \begin_inset space ~
22010 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
22011 with the image size is printed.
22014 \begin_layout Standard
22015 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
22016 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
22018 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
22021 \begin_layout Standard
22023 \begin_inset Graphics
22024 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
22032 \begin_layout Standard
22033 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
22034 the image into a float, see section
22035 \begin_inset space ~
22039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22041 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
22048 \begin_layout Subsection
22050 \begin_inset Index idx
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22062 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
22069 \begin_layout Standard
22070 You can insert images in any known file format.
22071 But as we explained in section
22072 \begin_inset space ~
22076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22078 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22082 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
22084 therefore uses the program
22088 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
22089 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
22090 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
22091 \begin_inset space ~
22095 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22097 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
22104 \begin_layout Standard
22105 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
22108 \begin_layout Description
22110 \begin_inset space ~
22113 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
22114 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
22115 Well-known bitmap image formats are
22116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22119 Graphics Interchange Format
22120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22123 (GIF, file extension
22124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22136 \begin_inset Index idx
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22171 Portable Network Graphics
22172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22175 (PNG, file extension
22176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22188 \begin_inset Index idx
22191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22223 Joint Photographic Experts Group
22224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22227 (JPG, file extension
22228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22252 \begin_inset Index idx
22255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22286 \begin_layout Description
22288 \begin_inset space ~
22291 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
22293 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
22294 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
22295 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
22296 \begin_inset Newline newline
22299 Scalable image formats can be
22300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22303 Scalable Vector Graphics
22304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22307 (SVG, file extension
22308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22316 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22320 \begin_inset Index idx
22323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22355 Encapsulated PostScript
22356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22359 (EPS, file extension
22360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22368 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22372 \begin_inset Index idx
22375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22407 Portable Document Format
22408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22411 (PDF, file extension
22412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22424 \begin_inset Index idx
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22439 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22442 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
22443 result will not be scalable.
22444 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22450 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
22458 \begin_layout Standard
22459 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
22466 \begin_layout Subsection
22467 Grouping of Image Settings
22468 \begin_inset Index idx
22471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22472 Images ! Settings grouping
22480 \begin_layout Standard
22481 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
22483 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
22484 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
22486 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
22487 need to manually change each of them.
22490 \begin_layout Standard
22491 A new group can be set by pressing the button
22494 \begin_inset space ~
22498 \begin_inset space ~
22510 \begin_inset space ~
22514 \begin_inset space ~
22520 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
22521 and checking the name of the desired group.
22524 \begin_layout Section
22526 \begin_inset Index idx
22529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22545 \begin_layout Standard
22546 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
22549 arg "tabular-insert"
22554 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22558 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns
22559 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288358
22560 , and you can select a specific (border) style
22563 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
22564 from the rest of the table.
22565 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
22566 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
22568 Here is an example table:
22571 \begin_layout Standard
22573 \begin_inset Tabular
22574 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
22575 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22576 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22693 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22758 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22773 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288479
22777 \begin_layout Standard
22779 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288540
22780 This corresponds to the
22781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22788 table style listed in the style selection.
22791 \begin_layout Standard
22793 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288387
22794 Other available styles include:
22797 \begin_layout Itemize
22799 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288551
22801 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22805 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22808 which looks line the above table, but without the first row being separated
22812 \begin_layout Itemize
22814 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288764
22815 a border-less table with no lines at all,
22818 \begin_layout Itemize
22820 \change_inserted -712698321 1554289543
22822 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22829 as often used in professional publishing with horizontal lines only and
22830 bold top/bottom lines (see
22840 \change_inserted 630872221 1621434190
22841 It is also possible to have an horizontal (thin) Footline above the last
22847 \begin_layout Standard
22849 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288823
22850 The default style used in the dialog as well as the style used by the toolbar
22851 button can be changed in
22853 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
22854 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
22858 So if the default style above is not the one you need, you should alter
22862 \begin_layout Subsection
22866 \begin_layout Standard
22867 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
22870 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22874 This brings up the table dialog.
22875 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
22876 cursor is placed currently.
22877 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22878 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
22879 done on all of your selection.
22882 \begin_layout Standard
22883 In addition to the table dialog, the
22886 \begin_inset space ~
22891 helps you in setting table properties.
22892 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22895 \begin_layout Standard
22899 \begin_inset space ~
22904 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22905 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
22906 current cell respectively.
22907 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
22909 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
22910 of text, see section
22911 \begin_inset space ~
22915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22917 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22924 \begin_layout Standard
22925 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
22926 using the check box
22935 This will merge the cells to
22939 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
22940 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
22941 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22942 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
22943 in the last row without the upper border:
22946 \begin_layout Standard
22948 \begin_inset Tabular
22949 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22950 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22951 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22952 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22953 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22954 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22965 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22968 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22974 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22983 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23050 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23085 \begin_layout Standard
23086 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
23087 -arguments for the table.
23088 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
23089 explained in the chapter
23096 \begin_inset space ~
23102 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
23103 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
23104 but are visible in the output.
23107 \begin_layout Standard
23108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
23111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23116 Most DVI-viewers are
23120 able to display rotations.
23128 \begin_layout Standard
23133 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
23138 adds lines for all cell borders.
23141 \begin_layout Subsection
23143 \begin_inset Index idx
23146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23147 Tables ! Multi-page
23153 \begin_inset Index idx
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23165 \begin_layout Standard
23166 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
23169 \begin_inset space ~
23173 \begin_inset space ~
23181 \begin_inset space ~
23186 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
23187 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
23190 \begin_layout Description
23195 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23196 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
23197 Except for the first page, if
23200 \begin_inset space ~
23208 \begin_layout Description
23212 \begin_inset space ~
23217 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
23218 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
23221 \begin_layout Description
23226 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23227 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
23228 except for the last page, if
23231 \begin_inset space ~
23239 \begin_layout Description
23243 \begin_inset space ~
23248 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
23249 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
23252 \begin_layout Description
23253 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
23254 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
23256 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23260 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
23263 \begin_inset space ~
23271 \begin_layout Standard
23272 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
23273 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
23274 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
23280 In this context, first means first in this order:
23283 \begin_inset space ~
23295 \begin_inset space ~
23300 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
23303 \begin_layout Standard
23305 \begin_inset Tabular
23306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
23307 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
23308 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
23309 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23310 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23311 <row endfirsthead="true">
23312 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23318 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
23323 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23332 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23342 <row endfirsthead="true">
23343 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23354 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23363 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23375 <row endhead="true">
23376 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23387 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23396 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23406 <row endhead="true">
23407 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23418 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23427 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23439 <row endfoot="true">
23440 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23451 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23491 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23584 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23637 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24432 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24441 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24450 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24461 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24492 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24523 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24554 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24574 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24585 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24616 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24627 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24636 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24647 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24678 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24709 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24720 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24740 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24771 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24782 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24833 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24864 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24895 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24926 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24937 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24957 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24988 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24999 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25019 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25050 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25081 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25112 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25174 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25185 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25205 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25236 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25267 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25298 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25329 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25360 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25391 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <row endlastfoot="true">
25422 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25433 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
25436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25442 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25459 \begin_layout Subsection
25461 \begin_inset Index idx
25464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25473 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
25480 \begin_layout Standard
25481 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
25482 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
25483 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
25484 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
25488 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
25491 \begin_layout Standard
25492 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
25493 for the column in the table dialog.
25494 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
25495 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
25499 \begin_layout Standard
25501 \begin_inset Tabular
25502 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
25503 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25504 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25505 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
25506 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25526 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25582 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25595 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25651 This is longer now.
25656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25707 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25708 This is longer now.
25713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25739 \begin_layout Standard
25740 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25741 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25746 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
25747 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25752 Selection with the mouse or with
25756 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25757 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
25758 the selection from outside the table.
25761 \begin_layout Section
25763 \begin_inset Index idx
25766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25773 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25782 \begin_layout Subsection
25786 \begin_layout Standard
25787 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
25788 have a fixed location.
25790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25797 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
25805 \begin_inset space ~
25810 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
25811 too many notes on the current page.
25814 \begin_layout Standard
25815 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25816 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
25817 and pages without text.
25818 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
25819 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
25820 Floats are therefore numbered.
25821 Referencing is described in section
25822 \begin_inset space ~
25826 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25828 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25835 \begin_layout Standard
25836 To insert a float, use the menu
25838 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25842 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25843 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
25845 After the label you can insert the caption text.
25846 \begin_inset Index idx
25849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25855 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
25856 paragraph within the float.
25857 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25858 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
25859 left-clicking on the box label.
25860 A closed float box looks like this:
25861 \begin_inset Graphics
25862 filename clipart/float.png
25867 – a gray button with a red label.
25870 \begin_layout Standard
25871 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25873 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25876 \begin_layout Subsection
25878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25880 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25885 \begin_inset Index idx
25888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25889 Floats ! Figure floats
25897 \begin_layout Standard
25899 \begin_inset space ~
25903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25905 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25909 was created using the menu
25911 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25912 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25918 arg "float-insert figure"
25922 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
25925 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25931 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25935 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
25936 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25938 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25940 \begin_inset space ~
25948 arg "layout-paragraph"
25954 \begin_layout Standard
25955 \begin_inset Float figure
25962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25964 \begin_inset Graphics
25965 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25975 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25980 name "fig:A-star-in"
25997 \begin_layout Standard
25998 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
25999 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
26001 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26010 ) and refer to it using the menu
26012 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26018 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26022 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
26023 vague references like
26024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26031 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
26032 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
26034 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26042 For more about cross-references, see section
26043 \begin_inset space ~
26047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26049 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26056 \begin_layout Standard
26057 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
26058 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
26059 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
26060 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
26061 as described in section
26062 \begin_inset space ~
26066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26068 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
26074 \begin_inset space ~
26078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26080 reference "fig:Two-images"
26084 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
26085 You can also set the images one below the other.
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26093 reference "fig:Undefinable"
26098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26100 reference "fig:Star"
26104 are the subfigures.
26107 \begin_layout Standard
26108 \begin_inset Float figure
26115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26116 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26120 \begin_inset Float figure
26127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26128 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26133 name "fig:Undefinable"
26145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26146 \begin_inset Graphics
26147 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
26159 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26163 \begin_inset Float figure
26170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26171 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26174 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26189 \begin_inset Graphics
26190 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
26202 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26209 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26214 name "fig:Two-images"
26231 \begin_layout Subsection
26233 \begin_inset Index idx
26236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 Floats ! Table floats
26245 \begin_layout Standard
26246 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
26248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26249 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
26252 or the toolbar button
26255 arg "float-insert table"
26259 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
26260 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
26261 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
26263 \begin_inset space ~
26267 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26269 reference "tab:Table-float"
26276 \begin_layout Standard
26277 \begin_inset Float table
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26285 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26288 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26290 name "tab:Table-float"
26302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26304 \begin_inset Tabular
26305 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
26306 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26307 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26308 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26311 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26347 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26436 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
26444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
26447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26457 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26460 \end{array}\right]$
26468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
26502 \begin_layout Subsection
26504 \begin_inset Index idx
26507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26516 \begin_layout Standard
26518 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
26519 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
26520 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
26522 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
26530 \begin_inset space ~
26538 \begin_layout Section
26540 \begin_inset Index idx
26543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26552 \begin_layout Standard
26554 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
26556 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
26557 \begin_inset space \space{}
26563 \begin_layout Standard
26564 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
26565 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
26567 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26571 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
26572 and its alignment within the page.
26575 \begin_layout Standard
26577 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26587 height_special "totalheight"
26592 backgroundcolor "none"
26595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26598 This is a minipage.
26599 The text is set in an italic style.
26602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26605 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
26606 another formatting.
26614 \begin_layout Standard
26615 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26618 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
26622 as described in section
26623 \begin_inset space ~
26627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26629 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
26634 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
26640 \begin_layout Standard
26641 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26651 height_special "totalheight"
26656 backgroundcolor "none"
26659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26660 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26661 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26667 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26671 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26681 height_special "totalheight"
26686 backgroundcolor "none"
26689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26690 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
26691 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
26699 \begin_layout Standard
26700 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26706 \begin_layout Standard
26707 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
26709 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26716 \begin_inset space ~
26724 \begin_layout Chapter
26725 Mathematical Formulas
26726 \begin_inset Index idx
26729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26736 \begin_inset Index idx
26739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26768 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26770 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26777 \begin_layout Standard
26778 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26783 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26786 \begin_layout Section
26788 \begin_inset Index idx
26791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26800 \begin_layout Standard
26801 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
26814 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
26816 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
26817 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26818 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26820 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26826 \begin_layout Standard
26827 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
26831 \begin_inset space ~
26836 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26839 \begin_layout Standard
26840 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
26841 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
26844 \begin_layout Standard
26845 This is a line with an inline formula
26846 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26852 \begin_layout Standard
26853 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
26854 paragraph, like this one:
26855 \begin_inset Formula
26862 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26865 \begin_layout Standard
26867 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26869 For example, typing
26870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26883 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
26884 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26888 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26891 \begin_inset space ~
26899 \begin_layout Subsection
26900 Navigating in Formulas
26901 \begin_inset Index idx
26904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26913 \begin_layout Standard
26914 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
26915 achieved with the arrow keys.
26917 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26918 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26923 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26924 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26928 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26932 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26935 \end{array}\right]$
26943 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
26948 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
26949 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26952 \begin_layout Standard
26957 , printed in this document as
26958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26962 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26969 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
26970 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
26971 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
26976 For example, if you want
26977 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26985 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26995 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26999 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27004 , since in the latter case only the
27007 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
27012 will be under the square root sign:
27013 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
27019 \begin_layout Standard
27020 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
27022 \begin_inset Formula
27024 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
27033 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
27034 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
27037 \begin_layout Subsection
27041 \begin_layout Standard
27042 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
27043 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
27047 and a cursor movement key to select text.
27048 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
27049 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
27050 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
27051 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
27055 \begin_layout Subsection
27056 Exponents and Subscripts
27057 \begin_inset Index idx
27060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27067 \begin_inset Index idx
27070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27079 \begin_layout Standard
27080 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
27083 arg "math-superscript"
27089 arg "math-subscript"
27092 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
27094 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
27097 , type in a formula
27100 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27110 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
27116 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
27120 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
27126 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27132 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
27134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27141 , you have to use an extra
27145 to separate the circumflex and the character.
27146 For example, if you want
27147 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
27153 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27159 Subscripts are similar: To get
27160 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
27166 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27174 \begin_layout Subsection
27176 \begin_inset Index idx
27179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27188 \begin_layout Standard
27189 Create a fraction either with the command
27195 or by using the icon
27198 arg "math-insert \\frac"
27204 \begin_inset space ~
27210 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
27211 The cursor is above the fraction line.
27212 To move it to the bottom, simply press
27217 To move back up, press
27222 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
27223 \begin_inset Formula
27225 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
27228 \end{array}\right)}\right]
27236 \begin_layout Subsection
27238 \begin_inset Index idx
27241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27250 \begin_layout Standard
27251 Roots can be created using the
27254 \begin_inset space ~
27262 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
27268 arg "math-insert \\root"
27290 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
27296 always produces a square root.
27299 \begin_layout Subsection
27300 Operators with Limits
27301 \begin_inset Index idx
27304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27311 \begin_inset Index idx
27314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27323 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27330 \begin_layout Standard
27332 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
27336 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
27339 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
27340 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
27341 by entering them as you would enter a super-
27342 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
27343 The sum operator will automatically place its
27344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27351 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
27353 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
27357 \begin_inset Formula
27359 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
27364 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
27368 \begin_layout Standard
27369 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
27371 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
27372 behind the operator and using the menu
27374 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27375 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
27377 \begin_inset space ~
27381 \begin_inset space ~
27395 \begin_layout Standard
27396 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
27397 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27401 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27405 \begin_inset Index idx
27408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27415 \begin_inset Formula
27417 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
27422 which will place the
27423 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
27427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27435 In inline formulas it looks like this:
27436 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
27442 \begin_layout Standard
27443 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
27450 Have a look at section
27451 \begin_inset space ~
27455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27457 reference "subsec:Functions"
27461 for an explanation of function macros.
27464 \begin_layout Subsection
27466 \begin_inset Index idx
27469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27478 \begin_layout Standard
27479 Most math symbols can be found in the
27482 \begin_inset space ~
27487 under one of several categories; including
27504 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
27508 \begin_layout Standard
27509 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27510 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
27511 don't have to use the
27514 \begin_inset space ~
27519 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
27521 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27524 \begin_layout Subsection
27526 \begin_inset Index idx
27529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27538 \begin_layout Standard
27539 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
27545 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27551 \begin_inset space ~
27559 arg "math-insert \\space"
27563 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
27564 For example, the sequence
27569 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27572 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27574 \begin_inset Graphics
27575 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27580 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
27581 the space marker and enter space again several times.
27582 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27583 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27584 , because they are negative
27586 Here are two examples:
27589 \begin_layout Standard
27599 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27605 \begin_layout Standard
27615 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27621 \begin_layout Subsection
27623 \begin_inset Index idx
27626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27633 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27635 name "subsec:Functions"
27642 \begin_layout Standard
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27651 contains under the button
27654 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27657 a number of function macros, such as
27658 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27662 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27670 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27677 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
27678 avoid confusions, because
27679 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27683 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27689 \begin_layout Standard
27690 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27692 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27696 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27702 \begin_layout Standard
27703 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
27704 are placed, as described in section
27705 \begin_inset space ~
27709 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27711 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27718 \begin_layout Subsection
27720 \begin_inset Index idx
27723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27732 \begin_layout Standard
27733 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
27735 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
27736 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27737 commands, for example, to enter
27738 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27741 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27742 Our example is entered by typing
27747 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27754 \begin_inset space ~
27758 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27760 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27764 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27767 \begin_layout Standard
27768 \begin_inset Float table
27775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27776 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27779 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27781 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27785 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
27793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27795 \begin_inset Tabular
27796 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27797 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27798 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27799 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27800 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27820 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27871 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27884 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27938 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27948 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27979 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27992 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
28002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28046 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
28056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28100 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
28110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28154 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
28164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28208 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
28218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28262 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
28272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28303 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28316 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
28326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
28338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28361 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
28382 \begin_layout Standard
28383 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
28386 \begin_inset space ~
28394 arg "math-insert \\hat"
28397 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
28401 \begin_layout Section
28402 Brackets and Delimiters
28403 \begin_inset Index idx
28406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28413 \begin_inset Index idx
28416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28423 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28425 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28432 \begin_layout Standard
28433 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
28435 For some purposes, using just the keys
28440 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
28441 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
28442 toolbar delimiter icon
28445 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28449 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
28450 \begin_inset Formula
28452 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
28460 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
28461 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
28465 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
28468 and the expression on the right was entered using the
28474 \begin_inset Formula
28476 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
28484 \begin_layout Standard
28485 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
28486 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
28490 \begin_layout Standard
28491 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
28492 left side and right side.
28493 If you use the option
28496 \begin_inset space ~
28501 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
28502 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
28504 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
28509 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
28510 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
28513 \begin_layout Standard
28514 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
28515 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
28516 is to go inside the brackets.
28517 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
28522 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
28523 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
28524 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
28528 arg "math-delim ( )"
28534 \begin_layout Section
28535 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
28536 \begin_inset Index idx
28539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28546 \begin_inset Index idx
28549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28556 \begin_inset Index idx
28559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28560 Math ! Multi-line Equations
28568 \begin_layout Standard
28569 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
28573 \begin_inset space ~
28581 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
28585 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
28586 Here is an example:
28587 \begin_inset Formula
28589 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28598 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
28599 \begin_inset space ~
28603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28605 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28610 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
28611 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
28612 This alignment is set in the box
28617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28625 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28655 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28663 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28666 for every column as default.
28667 For example, the sequence
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28679 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
28680 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
28681 corresponds to the relevant column.
28682 The result will look like this:
28683 \begin_inset Formula
28686 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28687 column & has & has\,right\\
28688 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28697 \begin_layout Standard
28698 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28701 arg "newline-insert newline"
28704 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28705 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28707 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28710 or the math toolbar.
28713 \begin_layout Standard
28714 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
28715 It can be created with the menu
28717 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28718 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28720 \begin_inset space ~
28732 Here is an example:
28733 \begin_inset Formula
28747 \begin_layout Standard
28748 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28751 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28754 arg "newline-insert newline"
28758 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
28763 arg "newline-insert newline"
28766 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28767 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28774 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
28775 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
28776 A new row is created by every further entry of
28779 arg "newline-insert newline"
28783 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28784 Here is an example:
28785 \begin_inset Formula
28787 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28788 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28793 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
28794 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28795 \begin_inset Formula
28797 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28805 \begin_layout Standard
28806 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28813 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28814 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28817 reference "eq:asquared"
28822 The other types are described in section
28823 \begin_inset space ~
28827 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28829 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28836 \begin_layout Section
28837 Formula Numbering and Referencing
28838 \begin_inset Index idx
28841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 Math ! Formula numbering
28848 \begin_inset Index idx
28851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28852 Math ! Referencing formulas
28858 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28860 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28867 \begin_layout Standard
28868 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28870 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28871 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28873 \begin_inset space ~
28877 \begin_inset space ~
28885 arg "math-number-toggle"
28889 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28890 within parentheses.
28891 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28892 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
28893 the document class.
28894 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28895 separated by a dot:
28896 \begin_inset Formula
28906 arg "math-number-toggle"
28909 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28910 You can only number displayed formulas.
28913 \begin_layout Standard
28914 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
28916 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28917 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28919 \begin_inset space ~
28923 \begin_inset space ~
28931 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28934 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28935 \begin_inset Formula
28938 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28944 To number all lines use the shortcut
28947 arg "math-number-toggle"
28953 \begin_layout Standard
28954 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28957 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28958 A label is inserted with the menu
28960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28969 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28970 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28971 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28972 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28980 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28983 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
28984 label type when you have many labels in your document.
28985 We inserted in the following example the label
28986 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28993 in the second line:
28994 \begin_inset Formula
28996 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28997 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
29002 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
29003 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
29004 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
29006 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29008 \begin_inset space ~
29016 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29020 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
29021 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29022 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
29023 as the formula number:
29026 \begin_layout Standard
29027 This is a cross-reference to equation (
29028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29030 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29037 \begin_layout Standard
29038 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
29039 's cross-reference box are described in section
29040 \begin_inset space ~
29044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29046 reference "sec:Cross-References"
29051 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
29059 \begin_layout Section
29060 User defined math macros
29061 \begin_inset Index idx
29064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29073 \begin_layout Standard
29075 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
29076 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
29077 Math macros are explained in section
29080 \begin_inset space ~
29092 \begin_layout Section
29096 \begin_layout Subsection
29098 \begin_inset Index idx
29101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29110 \begin_layout Standard
29111 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
29112 To set a font in a formula, use the
29115 \begin_inset space ~
29123 arg "math-insert \\font"
29126 , or enter its command, listed in table
29127 \begin_inset space ~
29131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29133 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29140 \begin_layout Standard
29141 \begin_inset Float table
29148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29149 \begin_inset Caption Standard
29151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29154 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
29158 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
29166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29168 \begin_inset Tabular
29169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="2">
29170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
29171 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
29174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29204 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
29212 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29227 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29231 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
29239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29258 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
29266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29291 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
29299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29314 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29318 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
29326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29340 <row change="inserted 5863344 1592055455">
29341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29346 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29347 \begin_inset Formula $\mathds{DOUBLESTROKE}$
29355 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29360 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055455
29372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29376 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
29384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29410 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
29418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29432 <row change="inserted -131811572 1591595416">
29433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29438 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29446 \begin_inset Formula $\mathscr{SCRIPT}$
29454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29459 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595416
29471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29475 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
29483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
29486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29509 \begin_layout Standard
29510 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29518 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
29521 \change_inserted 5863344 1592055666
29523 \change_deleted -131811572 1591595671
29527 \change_inserted -131811572 1591595667
29546 \begin_layout Standard
29547 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
29548 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
29553 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
29554 space when you need a space in the box.
29555 Here is an example where
29556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29567 denotes the set of numbers:
29568 \begin_inset Formula
29570 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
29578 \begin_layout Standard
29579 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
29580 You can, for example, put a character in
29589 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29593 \begin_inset Newline newline
29596 So it is better not to use this feature.
29599 \begin_layout Standard
29600 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29601 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29605 \begin_inset Newline newline
29608 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29614 , which works like the other typeface commands:
29615 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29621 \begin_layout Standard
29628 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
29631 \begin_layout Standard
29632 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
29634 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29635 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29637 \begin_inset space ~
29645 \begin_layout Subsection
29647 \begin_inset Index idx
29650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29659 \begin_layout Standard
29660 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
29662 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
29666 \begin_inset space ~
29670 \begin_inset space ~
29678 \begin_inset space ~
29686 arg "math-insert \\font"
29690 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29691 in black instead of blue.
29692 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29693 Here is an example:
29694 \begin_inset Formula
29697 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29698 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29707 \begin_layout Subsection
29709 \begin_inset Index idx
29712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29721 \begin_layout Standard
29722 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
29723 automatically chosen in most situations.
29741 For most characters,
29749 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
29750 and certain other structures, are set larger in
29755 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
29756 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29757 thinks are appropriate.
29758 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29761 arg "math-insert \\style"
29765 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29766 For example, you can set
29767 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29770 , which is normally in
29779 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29783 The four styles are used in the following example:
29786 \begin_layout Standard
29787 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29791 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29795 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29799 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29805 \begin_layout Standard
29806 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
29807 is set in a particular size with the menu
29809 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29811 \begin_inset space ~
29816 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29817 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
29818 will be adjusted to correspond.
29819 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29830 \begin_layout Standard
29834 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29840 \begin_layout Section
29841 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29843 \begin_inset Index idx
29846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29853 \begin_inset Index idx
29856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29865 \begin_layout Standard
29867 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
29868 that are in common use.
29871 \begin_layout Subsection
29872 Enabling AMS-Support
29875 \begin_layout Standard
29876 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
29878 \change_inserted -131811572 1600338725
29894 \change_deleted -131811572 1600338685
29895 selecting the checkbox
29898 \begin_inset space ~
29902 \begin_inset space ~
29906 \begin_inset space ~
29915 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29919 \begin_inset Index idx
29922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29923 Document ! Settings
29931 \begin_inset space ~
29937 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29938 -errors in formulas,
29939 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29942 \begin_layout Subsection
29944 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29946 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29951 \begin_inset Index idx
29954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29955 Math ! Multi-line Equations
29963 \begin_layout Standard
29964 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29965 provides a selection of different formula types.
29967 allows you to choose between
29988 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29989 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29996 , for an explanation of these formula types.
29999 \begin_layout Chapter
30003 \begin_layout Section
30005 \begin_inset Index idx
30008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30017 name "sec:Cross-References"
30024 \begin_layout Standard
30025 One of \SpecialChar LyX
30026 's strengths is cross-references.
30027 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
30029 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
30030 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
30031 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
30034 \begin_layout Enumerate
30038 \begin_layout Enumerate
30039 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30041 name "enu:Second-item"
30048 \begin_layout Enumerate
30052 \begin_layout Standard
30053 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
30055 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30058 or by pressing the toolbar button
30065 A gray label box like this:
30066 \begin_inset Graphics
30067 filename clipart/label.png
30071 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
30073 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
30075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30108 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
30109 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
30111 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30125 \begin_layout Standard
30126 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
30128 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30131 or the toolbar button
30134 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
30138 A gray cross-reference box like this:
30139 \begin_inset Graphics
30140 filename clipart/reference.png
30144 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
30146 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
30147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30159 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
30163 \begin_layout Standard
30164 As an alternative to
30166 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30169 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
30174 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
30175 to the actual cursor position via the menu
30177 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
30189 \begin_layout Standard
30190 Here is our cross-reference: Item
30191 \begin_inset space ~
30195 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30197 reference "enu:Second-item"
30204 \begin_layout Standard
30205 It is recommended to use a protected space
30209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30210 described in section
30211 \begin_inset space ~
30215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30217 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
30226 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
30227 line breaks between them.
30230 \begin_layout Standard
30231 There are eight formats of cross-references:
30234 \begin_layout Description
30235 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
30236 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30238 reference "fig:Two-images"
30245 \begin_layout Description
30246 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
30247 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
30249 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30259 reference "eq:tanhExp"
30266 \begin_layout Description
30267 <page>: prints the page number: Page
30268 \begin_inset space ~
30272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30273 LatexCommand pageref
30274 reference "fig:Two-images"
30281 \begin_layout Description
30283 \begin_inset space ~
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30290 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
30291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30292 LatexCommand vpageref
30293 reference "fig:Two-images"
30298 \begin_inset Newline newline
30301 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
30302 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
30303 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
30304 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
30305 it prints “on the next page”.
30306 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
30309 \begin_layout Description
30311 \begin_inset space ~
30315 \begin_inset space ~
30319 \begin_inset space ~
30322 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
30323 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30325 reference "fig:Two-images"
30330 \begin_inset Newline newline
30333 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
30339 ; otherwise it behaves like
30343 \begin_inset space ~
30347 \begin_inset space ~
30356 \begin_layout Description
30358 \begin_inset space ~
30361 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
30362 \begin_inset Newline newline
30366 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30374 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30384 \begin_inset Index idx
30387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30389 packages ! prettyref
30395 \begin_inset Index idx
30398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 packages ! refstyle
30411 \begin_inset Newline newline
30414 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
30415 -package should be used for this feature by setting
30418 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30422 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30423 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30431 is the default and preferred because
30435 supports only English documents.
30436 The format is specified by using the command
30440 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30449 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30450 preamble of the document.
30451 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
30453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30469 \begin_inset Newline newline
30476 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30481 \begin_inset Newline newline
30492 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30493 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
30495 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
30496 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30501 , you might do so as follows:
30502 \begin_inset Newline newline
30509 newref\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
30510 format{prop}{Proposition
30515 \begin_inset Newline newline
30518 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
30519 the package documentation
30520 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30522 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30528 \begin_inset Newline newline
30539 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30546 \begin_layout Description
30548 \begin_inset space ~
30551 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
30552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30553 LatexCommand nameref
30554 reference "fig:Two-images"
30561 \begin_layout Description
30563 \begin_inset space ~
30566 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30567 label for the reference:
30568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30569 LatexCommand labelonly
30570 reference "fig:Two-images"
30575 \begin_inset Newline newline
30578 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
30579 Code, if you want to issue a command
30580 that \SpecialChar LyX
30586 , then you may want to use the
30589 \begin_inset space ~
30594 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
30596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30604 This is the form needed for e.
30605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30609 \begin_inset space \space{}
30616 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
30617 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30619 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30623 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
30627 \begin_layout Standard
30628 You can only use the style
30632 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
30636 is always possible.
30639 \begin_layout Standard
30640 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
30641 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
30643 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30644 \begin_inset space ~
30648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30650 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30662 \begin_inset space ~
30666 \begin_inset space ~
30671 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30672 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757593
30673 (Ctrl-clicking on a cross-reference will also take you to its corresponding
30676 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30679 \begin_inset space ~
30684 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30685 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30688 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30692 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757706
30693 or, using the menu:
30695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
30696 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
30704 \begin_layout Standard
30705 You can change labels at any time.
30706 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
30708 \change_deleted -584632292 1599757720
30710 \change_inserted -584632292 1599757724
30711 change them all manually
30716 \begin_layout Standard
30717 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30719 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
30723 \begin_layout Standard
30724 References are described in detail in the section
30735 \begin_layout Section
30736 Table of Contents and other Listings
30737 \begin_inset Index idx
30740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30747 \begin_inset Index idx
30750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30751 Navigating ! Outline
30757 \begin_inset Index idx
30760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30767 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30776 \begin_layout Subsection
30778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30780 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30787 \begin_layout Standard
30788 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30790 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30791 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
30793 \begin_inset space ~
30797 \begin_inset space ~
30803 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30805 If you click on it, the
30809 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
30810 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30811 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30813 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30820 that is described in section
30821 \begin_inset space ~
30825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30827 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30834 \begin_layout Standard
30835 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30836 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
30838 \begin_inset space ~
30842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30844 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30848 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30850 \begin_inset space ~
30854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30856 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30860 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
30862 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30865 \begin_layout Subsection
30866 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
30867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30869 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30876 \begin_layout Standard
30877 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
30879 You can insert them via the
30881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30882 List/Contents/References
30885 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30888 \begin_layout Section
30889 URLs and Hyperlinks
30890 \begin_inset Index idx
30893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30900 \begin_inset Index idx
30903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 \begin_layout Subsection
30914 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30923 \begin_layout Standard
30924 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30932 \begin_layout Standard
30933 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
30935 \begin_inset Flex URL
30938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30940 https://www.lyx.org
30948 \begin_layout Standard
30949 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
30955 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
30959 \begin_layout Standard
30960 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30968 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30977 \begin_layout Subsection
30979 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30981 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30988 \begin_layout Standard
30989 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30994 or with the toolbar button
31001 The appearing dialog has two fields:
31010 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
31011 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
31012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31014 name "LyX's homepage"
31015 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31020 , an Email address like this:
31021 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31023 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
31024 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
31030 , or a link to a file.
31035 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31043 \begin_layout Standard
31044 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
31046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31057 to the link target.
31060 \begin_layout Standard
31061 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
31062 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
31063 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
31064 the text style dialog.
31065 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
31069 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31071 name "LyX's homepage"
31072 target "https://www.lyx.org"
31080 \begin_layout Standard
31081 The link text color can be changed, when the option
31085 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
31087 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31088 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31092 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
31094 \begin_inset Newline newline
31102 \begin_inset Newline newline
31109 in the PDF Properties dialog.
31110 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303457
31114 \begin_layout Section
31116 \change_inserted -584632292 1588303474
31118 \begin_inset Index idx
31121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31130 name "sec:Counters"
31137 \begin_layout Standard
31139 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31140 One powerful feature of \SpecialChar LaTeX
31141 is its ability to manage counters.
31142 Mostly, this is handled automatically, but there are times one wants to
31143 modify counters directly.
31144 This can be done in
31145 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500277
31147 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500277
31150 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31151 using the counter inset, which is accessible from the Edit menu.
31152 This allows one to set a counter's value; to reset it (to zero);
31156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31158 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541231
31159 Note that the section counter, e.g., starts with its value at zero and then
31160 is incremented to one when the first section is created.
31161 So, if you want the next section to be section five, say, then you need
31162 to set the section counter to four.
31169 to add to the value (or subtract from it, since the value added can be
31170 negative); to save it; to restore the saved value; and to print the value.
31171 These effects can also be limited to
31172 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500332
31174 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500332
31177 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31179 And they will appear in HTML and DocBook output, as well as in
31180 \change_deleted 630872221 1621500350
31182 \change_inserted 630872221 1621500350
31185 \change_inserted -584632292 1602541139
31189 \begin_layout Standard
31191 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529162
31192 There are five commands you can use:
31195 \begin_layout Enumerate
31197 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529167
31202 Allows you to assign a specific value to a counter
31205 \begin_layout Enumerate
31207 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529177
31212 Allows you to add some specified amount to a counter (or to subtract, if
31213 you choose a negative number)
31216 \begin_layout Enumerate
31218 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529180
31223 Sets the value of the counter to 0.
31226 \begin_layout Enumerate
31228 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529184
31231 Save value of counter:
31233 Saves the value of the counter so that it can later be restored.
31236 \begin_layout Enumerate
31238 \change_inserted -584632292 1588529187
31241 Restore value of counter:
31243 Restores the previously saved value.
31246 \begin_layout Standard
31248 \change_inserted -584632292 1588374230
31249 The dialog allows you to choose which counter you wish to modify from all
31250 those that are available in the current document class.
31255 \begin_layout Section
31257 \begin_inset Index idx
31260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31267 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31269 name "sec:Appendices"
31276 \begin_layout Standard
31277 Appendices are created with the menu
31279 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31281 \begin_inset space ~
31285 \begin_inset space ~
31291 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
31292 as the appendix part of the book.
31293 This part is marked with a red borderline.
31296 \begin_layout Standard
31297 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
31298 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
31299 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
31300 and the subsection number.
31301 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
31305 \begin_layout Standard
31307 \begin_inset space ~
31311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31313 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
31321 \begin_inset space ~
31325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31327 reference "subsec:Export"
31334 \begin_layout Section
31336 \begin_inset Index idx
31339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31348 name "sec:Bibliography"
31355 \begin_layout Standard
31356 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
31358 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
31359 \begin_inset space ~
31363 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31365 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31372 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
31377 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
31378 \begin_inset space ~
31382 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31384 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
31389 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
31390 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
31391 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
31395 using a bibliography database.
31398 \begin_layout Standard
31399 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
31400 use two bibliographies in this document, a
31404 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
31405 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
31406 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
31407 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
31408 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
31411 \begin_layout Subsection
31412 The Bibliography Environment
31413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31415 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31422 \begin_layout Standard
31427 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
31429 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
31438 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
31440 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
31441 of ASCII characters only.
31445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31447 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31450 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31456 \begin_inset Newline newline
31460 \begin_inset Flex URL
31463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31465 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set
31475 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31485 , a short form of its title, as the key.
31486 \begin_inset Newline newline
31493 for the entry, references to it will appear with this label instead of
31494 the number of the entry.
31499 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31508 \begin_layout Standard
31509 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31511 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31514 or the toolbar button
31517 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31521 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
31522 containing the available citations.
31523 Select one or more keys from the list and
31533 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31534 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
31538 \begin_layout Standard
31539 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the
31540 bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31541 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
31543 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31547 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31553 \begin_layout Standard
31557 Companion Second Edition
31560 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31562 key "latexcompanion"
31570 \begin_layout Standard
31571 The \SpecialChar LyX
31572 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31573 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31583 \begin_layout Standard
31584 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31591 \begin_inset Index idx
31594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31603 \change_deleted -712698321 1555659455
31604 the label needs to be given the form
31605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31616 Author A and Author B(Year)
31617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31624 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
31631 \begin_inset space ~
31636 in the document settings
31637 \begin_inset Index idx
31640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31641 Document ! Settings
31648 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31650 \begin_inset space ~
31656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31658 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31666 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31668 Once you have done that, the
31671 \change_inserted 630872221 1621589258
31673 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660530
31676 dialog has three input fields instead of the
31693 The first one takes the Author list as it should be displayed in the citation
31694 reference, the second the year (without parentheses).
31695 These two are madatory.
31696 If there are multiple authors and you want to both refer to them as a full
31699 Baker, Jones, and Williams
31701 ) and in abrreviated form (
31708 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660544
31709 add the abbreviated form to
31713 and the full list to the optional
31721 \change_inserted -712698321 1555659886
31722 If specified like this,
31724 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles
31725 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660646
31728 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31735 is specified, toggling
31736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31740 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31743 in the citation dialog or the citation context menu will switch between
31744 full and abbreviated list
31748 \change_inserted -712698321 1555660793
31749 Note that the author and year specified in the dialog are only used for
31750 the citation references.
31751 In the bibliography entry, author and year must be added manually.
31756 \begin_layout Standard
31757 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
31760 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31762 \begin_inset space ~
31770 arg "layout-paragraph"
31774 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31777 \begin_layout Subsection
31778 Bibliography databases
31779 \begin_inset Index idx
31782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31783 Bibliography ! Databases
31789 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31791 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31799 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
31804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31805 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
31807 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
31808 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31813 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
31815 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
31816 your working field in a database.
31817 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
31818 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
31819 list for that document.
31820 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
31824 \begin_layout Standard
31825 The database is a text file with the file extension
31826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31837 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
31838 The format is explained in
31839 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31846 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31848 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31850 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31856 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
31857 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31858 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31860 \begin_inset Flex URL
31863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31865 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31873 \begin_layout Standard
31875 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31876 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31877 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
31879 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
31881 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
31882 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31883 Those are addressed by
31888 \begin_inset Index idx
31891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31893 packages ! biblatex
31899 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31900 (although it has been significantly
31901 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31911 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31912 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31913 might conversely fail to correctly
31914 handle databases that use specific
31923 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
31927 \begin_layout Standard
31928 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31933 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
31935 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31939 \begin_inset Index idx
31942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31943 Document ! Settings
31955 \begin_inset space ~
31960 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31968 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31969 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31971 \begin_inset Index idx
31974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31975 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31984 \begin_layout Standard
31985 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31988 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31989 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
31991 \begin_inset space ~
31997 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
31998 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32006 Add bibliography to TOC
32008 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
32013 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
32014 in the document or just the cited references.
32016 \change_inserted -712698321 1530969762
32021 drop box lets you specify the encoding of the database(s), should this
32022 differ from the encoding of the document.
32027 \begin_layout Standard
32028 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32029 style file is a text file with the file extension
32030 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32038 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32041 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
32042 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
32043 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
32044 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
32046 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
32051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32052 For information on how this is done, have a look at
32053 \begin_inset Newline newline
32057 \begin_inset CommandInset href
32059 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
32069 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32074 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
32078 \begin_layout Standard
32079 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
32082 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32084 \begin_inset Index idx
32087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32088 Bibliography ! Biblatex
32094 \begin_inset Index idx
32097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32099 packages ! biblatex
32107 \begin_layout Standard
32108 Accessing a database via
32112 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32114 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599883
32116 \change_inserted 630872221 1621599883
32121 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32122 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
32124 \begin_inset space ~
32130 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32131 you cannot select a
32136 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045799
32140 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32143 \change_inserted -712698321 1531045867
32144 As for the styles, note the following.
32149 \begin_layout Standard
32154 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
32156 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32167 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
32168 file (text file with the file extension
32169 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32180 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
32181 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
32183 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
32187 \begin_layout Standard
32192 styles are not set in the
32195 \begin_inset space ~
32200 dialog, but in the document settings.
32201 \begin_inset Index idx
32204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32205 Document ! Settings
32210 However, in the dialog in the
32214 field, which is only visible if you use
32218 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
32219 example how its heading will appear).
32220 These options are described in detail in the
32225 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32235 \begin_layout Standard
32236 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
32237 \begin_inset space ~
32241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32243 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32253 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32254 Bibliography Processors
32257 \begin_layout Standard
32258 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
32259 uses a bibliography processor,
32260 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
32261 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
32262 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32264 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
32265 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
32268 \begin_layout Standard
32269 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
32271 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
32272 You can do this on a general level in
32274 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32275 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32276 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32279 or for individual documents in
32281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32282 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32286 The following variants are available by default:
32289 \begin_layout Description
32290 biber a specific, modern processor
32291 \begin_inset Index idx
32294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32301 developed exclusively for
32305 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32311 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
32316 makes use of; if you use the
32320 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
32327 \begin_layout Description
32328 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
32329 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
32330 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
32334 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
32337 \begin_layout Description
32338 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
32339 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
32343 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
32347 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
32351 features are supported.
32354 \begin_layout Standard
32355 By default (with the
32361 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32362 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32375 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32376 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32377 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32380 ), \SpecialChar LyX
32381 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
32394 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32395 -based bibliography styles).
32396 This should suit most needs.
32399 \begin_layout Standard
32400 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
32401 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
32402 (in \SpecialChar LyX
32407 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32408 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
32409 You can adjust it in
32411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
32412 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
32413 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
32419 \begin_layout Standard
32420 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
32421 can add below the selection.
32422 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
32423 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32429 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32443 \begin_layout Standard
32445 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
32447 These are explained in detail in section
32449 Customizing Bibliographies
32453 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32458 Additional Features
32461 \change_deleted 630872221 1621599958
32465 \begin_layout Subsection
32467 \begin_inset Index idx
32470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32471 Bibliography ! Citation format
32477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32479 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32486 \begin_layout Standard
32487 Many different citation formats are common, e.
32488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32492 \begin_inset space \space{}
32495 numerical citation (as
32496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32503 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
32504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32511 ) or author-year citations (as
32512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32521 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
32525 \begin_layout Standard
32526 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32530 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32534 \begin_inset Index idx
32537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32538 Document ! Settings
32543 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
32549 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
32550 labels, is there to use
32553 \begin_inset space ~
32564 \begin_inset space ~
32569 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32570 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32572 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32579 \begin_layout Standard
32580 With a bibliography database (see
32581 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32583 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32590 ) one has in contrary to the
32594 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32595 These style formats are available:
32598 \begin_layout Description
32600 \begin_inset space ~
32603 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32604 -based approached without any additional packages
32605 (simple numeric citations).
32608 \begin_layout Description
32609 Biblatex loads the package
32614 \begin_inset Index idx
32617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32619 packages ! biblatex
32624 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32626 Biblatex citation style
32630 Biblatex bibliography style
32633 Options to the package
32637 can be entered in the
32644 \begin_layout Description
32646 \begin_inset space ~
32650 \begin_inset space ~
32653 mode) loads the package
32657 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32658 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
32670 behavior very closely.
32675 this option has some additional styles.
32680 styles are also supported by this variant.
32683 \begin_layout Description
32685 \begin_inset space ~
32688 (BibTeX) loads the package
32693 \begin_inset Index idx
32696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32703 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32706 \begin_layout Description
32708 \begin_inset space ~
32711 (BibTeX) loads the package
32716 \begin_inset Index idx
32719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32726 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32729 \begin_layout Standard
32738 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
32740 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32749 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32751 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
32752 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32754 Biblatex citation style
32757 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
32763 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
32767 \begin_layout Standard
32768 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
32769 are available in the
32774 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
32775 a name prefix such as
32776 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32780 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32791 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32796 \begin_inset space \space{}
32800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32811 \begin_layout Standard
32812 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
32814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32818 \begin_inset space \space{}
32821 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
32823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32827 \begin_inset space \space{}
32831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32843 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32847 \begin_inset space ~
32855 \begin_inset space ~
32861 Here is a simple example where the text
32862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32873 appears after the reference:
32876 \begin_layout Quote
32878 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32881 key "latexcompanion"
32889 \begin_layout Standard
32890 All styles except for
32894 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
32896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32900 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32904 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32909 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32910 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
32911 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
32916 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
32917 multi-citation (so-called
32918 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32921 qualified citation lists
32922 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32928 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
32933 dialog will display three columns in the field
32940 \begin_inset space ~
32948 \begin_inset space ~
32956 \begin_inset space ~
32962 If you double-click on an item's
32965 \begin_inset space ~
32973 \begin_inset space ~
32978 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32981 General text before
32987 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32990 \begin_layout Subsection
32992 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509964
32993 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32995 name "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
32999 Opening cited documents from within \SpecialChar LyX
33003 \begin_layout Standard
33005 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509000
33007 supports opening documents selected citations point to via the
33010 \begin_inset space ~
33014 \begin_inset space ~
33018 \begin_inset space ~
33022 \begin_inset space ~
33025 Content\SpecialChar ldots
33028 context menu if specific conditions are met:
33031 \begin_layout Itemize
33033 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526971
33034 If citation entries include any of the fields
33035 \begin_inset Flex Code
33038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33040 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33049 \begin_inset Flex Code
33052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33054 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33062 for BibTeX and BibLaTeX,
33063 \begin_inset Flex Code
33066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33068 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33076 for BibLaTeX (covering arXiv, JSTOR, PubMed, HDL, Google Books
33077 \begin_inset Flex Code
33080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33082 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33090 ), the action will launch a web browser with the appropriate link.
33093 \begin_layout Itemize
33095 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509157
33096 If citation entries include any of the fields
33097 \begin_inset Flex Code
33100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33102 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33110 (filled by JabRef) or
33111 \begin_inset Flex Code
33114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33116 \change_inserted -712698321 1598508820
33124 (filled by KBibTeX) containing an URL that points to a file on your local
33125 drive, the action will launch an appropriate file viewer.
33126 At the moment only absolute paths are accepted.
33129 \begin_layout Standard
33131 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33132 In addition to that, \SpecialChar LyX
33133 also searches your disk for matching files if you
33136 Search drive for cited files
33140 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
33141 Preferences\SpecialChar ldots
33142 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33143 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
33147 It uses the tokens supplied at
33151 in the same preferences section (by default: year and authors).
33152 Any of the tokens in the pattern must occur in the
33153 \change_deleted 630872221 1621608311
33155 \change_inserted 630872221 1621608312
33157 \change_inserted -712698321 1598526494
33158 of the file (at arbitrary position).
33160 opens the first matching file it finds.
33161 This might or might not be the file you are looking for; the more systematic
33162 your file naming is, and the less ambiguous keywords you use, the greater
33163 the chance this works for you.
33168 \begin_layout Standard
33170 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33171 The pattern syntax uses specific keywords.
33172 These are basically Bib\SpecialChar TeX
33174 \begin_inset Flex Code
33177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33179 \change_inserted -712698321 1598527586
33188 \begin_inset Flex Code
33191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33193 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509565
33201 , but there are also special keys, which are documented in the
33203 Customization manual
33208 Cite format description
33215 \begin_layout Section
33217 \begin_inset Index idx
33220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33236 \begin_layout Standard
33237 An index entry is created if you use the menu
33239 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33241 \begin_inset space ~
33246 or the toolbar button
33253 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
33254 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
33255 by \SpecialChar LyX
33256 as the index entry.
33259 \begin_layout Standard
33260 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
33262 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33263 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
33265 \begin_inset space ~
33271 A light blue box labeled
33272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33283 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
33284 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
33288 \begin_layout Standard
33289 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
33290 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33291 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
33292 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33294 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33296 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
33304 \begin_layout Subsection
33305 Grouping Index Entries
33306 \begin_inset Index idx
33309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33318 \begin_layout Standard
33319 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
33321 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
33322 lists under the entry
33323 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33331 First we create the entry
33332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33340 \begin_inset space ~
33344 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33346 reference "subsec:Lists"
33351 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
33352 \begin_inset space ~
33356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33358 reference "sec:Itemize"
33362 , we insert the command
33365 \begin_layout Standard
33371 \begin_layout Standard
33375 \begin_layout Standard
33381 \begin_layout Standard
33382 for the enumerated list in section
33383 \begin_inset space ~
33387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33389 reference "sec:Enumerate"
33396 \begin_layout Standard
33397 The exclamation mark
33398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33405 marks the grouping levels.
33406 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
33407 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
33408 If we don't have an index entry for
33409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33416 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
33419 \begin_layout Subsection
33421 \begin_inset Index idx
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33425 Index ! Page ranges
33433 \begin_layout Standard
33434 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
33436 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
33437 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
33438 an index entry in section
33439 \begin_inset space ~
33443 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33445 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
33452 \begin_layout Standard
33455 Paragraph environments|(
33458 \begin_layout Standard
33459 and another entry at the end of section
33460 \begin_inset space ~
33464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33466 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
33473 \begin_layout Standard
33476 Paragraph environments|)
33479 \begin_layout Standard
33481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33501 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33504 respectively start and end the index range.
33505 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
33506 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
33507 the pages of the indexed document parts.
33508 An example is the index entry
33509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33512 Document ! Settings
33513 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33519 \begin_layout Subsection
33521 \begin_inset Index idx
33524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33525 Index ! Cross referencing
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33534 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
33535 We referred for example in the index entry
33536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33544 \begin_inset space ~
33548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33550 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33554 ) to the index entry
33555 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33559 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33562 in the same section using the entry
33565 \begin_layout Standard
33568 GIF|see{Image formats}
33571 \begin_layout Standard
33572 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33574 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33575 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33578 \begin_layout Subsection
33580 \begin_inset Index idx
33583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33584 Index ! Entry order
33592 \begin_layout Standard
33593 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
33594 follow the rules for the index order.
33595 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33601 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33609 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33618 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33619 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33644 \begin_inset Index idx
33647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33648 Dummy entries ! maïs
33654 \begin_inset Index idx
33657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33658 Dummy entries ! maître
33664 \begin_inset Index idx
33667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33668 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
33673 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
33674 maïs, maison, maître.
33675 To achieve this, we use the command
33678 \begin_layout Standard
33681 previous entry@current entry
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 In our case we want to have
33686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33701 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33704 \begin_layout Standard
33710 \begin_layout Standard
33711 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33712 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33714 See the next subsection for an example.
33717 \begin_layout Subsection
33719 \begin_inset Index idx
33722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33723 Index ! Entry layout
33731 \begin_layout Standard
33732 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
33733 \begin_inset Index idx
33736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33739 This is an italic dummy entry
33744 You can also format the page number using the character
33745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33752 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33753 -command without a backslash.
33754 We can write for example
33757 \begin_layout Standard
33760 italic page number:|textit
33763 \begin_layout Standard
33764 to get the page number in italic.
33765 \begin_inset Index idx
33768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
33774 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33775 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
33777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33785 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33793 \begin_inset space ~
33799 Have a look at section
33800 \begin_inset space ~
33804 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33806 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33810 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33814 \begin_layout Standard
33815 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33823 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33827 to generate the index, see section
33828 \begin_inset space ~
33832 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33834 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33843 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33848 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
33849 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33852 key "latexcompanion"
33865 \begin_layout Standard
33866 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
33868 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33869 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
33870 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
33871 If so, put the following in the preamble
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33886 \begin_layout Standard
33890 \begin_layout Standard
33896 \begin_layout Standard
33897 in the index entry.
33898 \begin_inset Index idx
33901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33902 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
33907 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
33908 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
33909 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
33912 \begin_layout Standard
33913 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33914 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
33915 a bold font for all index entries.
33916 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33928 documentation for details,
33929 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33931 key "makeindex,xindy"
33939 \begin_layout Subsection
33941 \begin_inset Index idx
33944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33951 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33953 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33960 \begin_layout Standard
33961 If the index generation program
33965 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
33966 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
33970 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33971 distribution, is used.
33975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33980 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
33981 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33982 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33983 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33984 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
33994 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33996 dialog, see section
33997 \begin_inset space ~
34001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34003 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34008 The available options are listed and explained in
34009 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34011 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
34017 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
34021 \begin_layout Standard
34022 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
34023 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
34026 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34027 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34031 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
34032 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
34035 \begin_layout Subsection
34039 \begin_layout Standard
34040 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
34041 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
34042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34049 next to the standard index.
34051 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
34052 that add this feature.
34059 \begin_inset Index idx
34062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34064 packages ! splitidx
34069 package to generate multiple indexes.
34070 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
34075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34076 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
34078 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34086 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
34087 style, but it also includes
34088 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
34089 Please consult the package's manual for details.
34097 \begin_layout Standard
34098 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
34099 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
34101 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34102 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34105 and select the option
34107 Use multiple Indexes
34114 already contains the standard index
34115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34123 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
34124 also appear as a heading) to the
34128 input field and press the
34133 The new index now also appears in the list.
34134 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
34135 label color to the new index.
34138 \begin_layout Standard
34139 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
34142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34143 List/Contents/References
34149 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
34150 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
34151 are additional features:
34154 \begin_layout Itemize
34155 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
34156 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
34159 \begin_layout Itemize
34160 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
34161 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
34166 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
34167 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
34168 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
34169 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
34172 \begin_layout Itemize
34177 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
34178 code in the name of the index.
34181 \begin_layout Section
34182 Nomenclature/Glossary
34183 \begin_inset Index idx
34186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34193 \begin_inset Index idx
34196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34225 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34227 name "sec:Nomenclature"
34234 \begin_layout Standard
34235 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
34236 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
34237 called nomenclature or glossary.
34240 \begin_layout Standard
34241 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34248 \begin_inset Index idx
34251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34259 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34268 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34272 \begin_layout Standard
34273 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
34274 and then use the menu
34276 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34282 \begin_inset space ~
34287 or the toolbar button
34290 arg "nomencl-insert"
34295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34306 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
34309 \begin_layout Standard
34310 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
34311 The first is the term or
34315 that you wish to define.
34320 of the term or symbol.
34323 \begin_layout Standard
34324 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34332 To use \SpecialChar TeX
34333 code for nomenclature entries the option
34337 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
34345 \begin_layout Subsection
34346 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
34347 \begin_inset Index idx
34350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34351 Nomenclature ! Layout
34359 \begin_layout Standard
34360 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
34364 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
34367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34371 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34375 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34379 \begin_inset Newline newline
34387 \begin_inset Newline newline
34393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34400 character starts/ends the formula.
34401 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34402 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
34404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34410 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34414 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
34424 \begin_layout Standard
34425 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34426 syntax is given in section
34427 \begin_inset space ~
34431 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34433 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34440 \begin_layout Standard
34444 \begin_inset space ~
34449 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34451 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34456 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34460 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34463 in this document is:
34464 \begin_inset Newline newline
34469 dummy entry for the character
34474 \begin_inset Newline newline
34486 \begin_inset space ~
34496 font use the command
34525 \begin_layout Standard
34526 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34531 \begin_inset space \space{}
34535 \begin_inset Newline newline
34551 \begin_inset Newline newline
34554 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34555 This command will make the font of all symbols
34562 \begin_inset space ~
34570 \begin_layout Standard
34571 If the characters |
34572 \begin_inset space \space{}
34576 \begin_inset space \space{}
34580 \begin_inset space \space{}
34584 \begin_inset space \space{}
34588 \begin_inset space \space{}
34591 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34592 code they need to be escaped
34594 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611122
34596 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611123
34599 character in front of them.
34600 \change_inserted -712698321 1610611807
34602 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34603 LatexCommand nomenclature
34604 symbol "%@, %|, %!, %\""
34605 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' %\"{}%\"{} '."
34611 \change_deleted -712698321 1610611114
34613 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34614 LatexCommand nomenclature
34615 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34616 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34626 \begin_layout Subsection
34627 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
34628 \begin_inset Index idx
34631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34632 Nomenclature ! Sort order
34640 \begin_layout Standard
34641 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34642 -code of the symbol
34644 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
34646 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34649 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34650 LatexCommand nomenclature
34652 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34660 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34664 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34665 LatexCommand nomenclature
34668 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34674 They will be sorted by
34675 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34687 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34701 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34704 will be sorted before the
34708 since the character
34709 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34716 is considered in sorting.
34719 \begin_layout Standard
34720 To control the sort order, you can edit the
34723 \begin_inset space ~
34728 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34729 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
34731 For the example given, you can insert
34735 in this field for the
34736 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34743 will be located before
34744 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34750 \begin_layout Standard
34751 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34756 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34766 \begin_layout Subsection
34767 Nomenclature Options
34768 \begin_inset Index idx
34771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34772 Nomenclature ! Options
34778 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34780 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34787 \begin_layout Standard
34792 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34793 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
34796 \begin_layout Description
34797 refeq Appends the phrase
34798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34813 to every nomenclature entry, where
34819 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34822 \begin_layout Description
34823 refpage Appends the phrase
34824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34839 to every nomenclature entry, where
34845 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34848 \begin_layout Description
34849 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34852 \begin_layout Standard
34853 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
34854 class options list in the
34856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34860 In this document the options
34867 \begin_layout Standard
34868 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34874 \begin_layout Standard
34875 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
34876 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34881 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34884 \begin_layout Description
34894 \begin_layout Description
34897 nomrefpage Like the
34904 \begin_layout Description
34907 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34916 \begin_layout Description
34920 \begin_inset space ~
34926 \begin_inset space ~
34931 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34934 \begin_layout Standard
34936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34940 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34943 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34944 If not, add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34948 \begin_layout Standard
34957 \begin_inset Newline newline
34963 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34967 \begin_inset space ~
34979 unskip, see equation
34982 \begin_inset Newline newline
34989 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34990 \begin_inset Newline newline
34996 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35000 \begin_inset space ~
35017 \begin_layout Standard
35018 If the numbers should be hyperlinks, assure that you use
35021 \begin_inset space ~
35026 in the document settings under
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35037 \begin_layout Standard
35045 \begin_inset Newline newline
35049 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35053 \begin_inset space ~
35065 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
35067 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
35068 \begin_inset Newline newline
35075 pagedeclaration}[1]{
35076 \begin_inset Newline newline
35080 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
35083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35084 \begin_inset space ~
35096 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
35101 \begin_layout Subsection
35102 Printing the Nomenclature
35103 \begin_inset Index idx
35106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35107 Nomenclature ! Printing
35115 \begin_layout Standard
35116 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
35118 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35119 List/Contents/References\SpecialChar menuseparator
35124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35135 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
35136 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
35137 You can choose between these settings:
35140 \begin_layout Description
35141 Default a space of 1
35142 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35148 \begin_layout Description
35150 \begin_inset space ~
35154 \begin_inset space ~
35157 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
35160 \begin_layout Description
35161 Custom custom space
35164 \begin_layout Standard
35165 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
35166 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35170 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35174 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
35182 For example, in order to change the name to
35186 , add the following line to the preamble:
35189 \begin_layout Standard
35202 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
35205 \begin_layout Standard
35206 When you are using another document language than English, replace
35207 \begin_inset Newline newline
35222 , where *** is the name of the language used.
35225 \begin_layout Subsection
35226 Nomenclature Program
35227 \begin_inset Index idx
35230 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35231 Nomenclature ! Program
35237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35239 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
35246 \begin_layout Standard
35252 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
35253 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
35255 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
35260 by adding options, see section
35261 \begin_inset space ~
35265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35267 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
35272 The available options are listed and explained in
35273 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35275 key "nomencl,makeindex"
35283 \begin_layout Section
35285 \begin_inset Index idx
35288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35295 \begin_inset Index idx
35298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35299 Document ! Branches
35305 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35307 name "sec:Branches"
35314 \begin_layout Standard
35315 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35316 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
35317 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
35318 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35321 \begin_layout Standard
35322 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35323 allows you to put text into branches.
35324 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35325 To create a branch, either select the menu
35327 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35328 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35331 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35333 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35340 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
35341 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35342 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35343 and whether the name of the branch should
35344 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
35345 (see below for an example).
35346 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
35347 to the name of the other) and to add
35348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35356 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35360 \begin_inset space ~
35363 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
35364 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35367 \begin_layout Standard
35368 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35369 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35374 where you can choose a branch.
35375 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
35379 \begin_layout Standard
35380 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
35381 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35385 \begin_inset Branch Question
35389 \begin_layout Standard
35394 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
35402 \begin_layout Standard
35403 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35412 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
35420 \begin_layout Standard
35427 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35428 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35431 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35432 Consider for example a file
35433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35437 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35440 which has the above branches.
35442 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35446 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35449 is active, the PDF export file would be called
35450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35473 branch were inactive,
35474 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35489 branch was active, likewise
35490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35502 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35505 branch was active, and
35506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35509 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35510 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35513 if both branches were active.
35514 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35515 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35521 \begin_layout Standard
35523 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147989
35524 It is also possible to
35525 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147965
35529 \change_deleted 5863208 1650147967
35531 \change_inserted 5863208 1650147977
35534 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
35539 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284375
35540 (they are marked with ~ before the name)
35544 \change_deleted 244031559 1635284383
35546 \change_inserted 244031559 1635284385
35549 make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35550 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
35554 \begin_inset space ~
35562 \begin_layout Standard
35563 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35567 \begin_layout Standard
35573 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35580 branch is deactivated.
35586 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35592 \begin_layout Standard
35593 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35594 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35595 definitions for each branch.
35596 For example you can define for the question branch
35600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35601 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35602 -syntax, see section
35603 \begin_inset space ~
35607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35609 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35621 \begin_layout Standard
35631 \begin_layout Standard
35641 \begin_layout Standard
35642 and for the answer branch
35645 \begin_layout Standard
35655 \begin_layout Standard
35665 \begin_layout Standard
35666 \begin_inset Branch Question
35670 \begin_layout Standard
35674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35702 \begin_layout Standard
35703 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35707 \begin_layout Standard
35711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35739 \begin_layout Standard
35740 Now it is possible to use the
35744 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35751 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35754 commands to obtain conditional output.
35755 Here is an example formula where only the
35762 \begin_inset Formula
35764 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35772 \begin_layout Standard
35773 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
35781 \begin_layout Standard
35782 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
35784 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35788 \begin_inset space \space{}
35791 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35793 For this advanced usage, see the
35799 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35802 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148012
35806 \begin_layout Standard
35808 \change_inserted 5863208 1650148601
35809 In case one extensively needs syncing activation branch status with open/close
35810 status of all branch insets in the document we provide
35815 function, which can be bound to keyboard shortcut or added to user-defined
35816 context menu of branch inset.
35821 \begin_layout Section
35823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35825 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35830 \begin_inset Index idx
35833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35842 \begin_layout Standard
35844 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655914
35849 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35850 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35854 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655917
35857 allows you to set up
35858 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651900
35860 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651929
35864 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651937
35866 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651944
35870 \change_deleted -712698321 1644655939
35874 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651948
35879 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651614
35881 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651616
35885 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651959
35887 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651961
35890 are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35892 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651813
35894 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651814
35902 \begin_inset Index idx
35905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35907 packages ! hyperref
35913 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653717
35914 which you need to enable by clicking
35916 Use Hyperref Support
35918 in order to set the PDF properties (if the package is already loaded by
35919 your document class or another package, the checkbox you need to click
35922 Customize Hyperref Options
35925 Among other things, hyperref
35926 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651887
35930 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653821
35932 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653851
35936 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653826
35940 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653859
35943 cross-references in the
35944 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653786
35948 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653751
35950 \change_deleted -712698321 1644653751
35954 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
35955 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653878
35958 table of contents entry or on a reference to
35959 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653918
35960 open a website or to
35962 move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
35964 \change_inserted -712698321 1644653971
35965 Furthermore, you can set PDF metadata (such as document author and title),
35966 or determine how the PDF is being opened by the reader program.
35971 \begin_layout Standard
35972 The header information in the dialog tab
35976 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35977 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example,
35978 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656745
35981 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35982 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35986 \begin_inset space ~
35990 \begin_inset space ~
35996 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654039
35999 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654041
36002 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author
36007 \begin_inset space ~
36011 \begin_inset space ~
36015 \begin_inset space ~
36020 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
36023 \begin_layout Standard
36025 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654066
36027 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654066
36035 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654103
36036 you can customize the
36037 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654105
36039 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654109
36043 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654087
36045 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654087
36049 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654147
36050 , and you can specify
36053 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654275
36055 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654283
36056 will look and if links for
36058 bibliographical backreferences are created
36059 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654335
36065 are links inserted at the end of bibliographic entries pointing to either
36066 sections, pages or slides on which these entries are being cited
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36076 \begin_inset space ~
36080 \begin_inset space ~
36085 option allows long links to be split;
36088 \begin_inset space ~
36092 \begin_inset space ~
36096 \begin_inset space ~
36104 \begin_inset space ~
36109 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
36112 \begin_inset space ~
36117 colors the different links.
36118 The default colors are:
36121 \begin_layout Labeling
36122 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36127 for hyperlinks and URLs
36130 \begin_layout Labeling
36131 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36139 \begin_layout Labeling
36140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
36148 \begin_layout Standard
36149 but you can change these in the
36150 \change_deleted -712698321 1644651692
36152 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651692
36158 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656056
36160 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656056
36166 For example, in this document they were changed with the
36167 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651709
36171 \change_inserted -712698321 1644651730
36181 \begin_layout Quote
36184 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
36187 \begin_layout Standard
36189 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654422
36194 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
36195 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
36196 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
36201 \begin_layout Standard
36206 you can specify if PDF
36207 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654456
36209 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654456
36213 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654511
36214 (shown as a collapsible outline in the PDF reader)
36216 should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for
36217 readers to navigate through the document.
36218 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
36221 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654607
36223 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654609
36227 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654594
36233 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654550
36235 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654551
36237 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654802
36240 you can instruct the PDF reader to uncollapse the outliner when opening
36249 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654838
36250 determines up to which level this uncollapsing is done.
36251 \change_deleted -712698321 1644654687
36252 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
36253 when opening the PDF.
36257 \begin_inset space ~
36260 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
36261 \begin_inset space ~
36264 1 will only display the sections
36265 \change_inserted -712698321 1644654724
36266 (collapsing the rest)
36269 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656154
36273 \begin_layout Standard
36275 \change_inserted -712698321 1644657105
36280 dialog tab you can insert hyperref options which are not among the ones
36281 described above as a comma-separated list (please refer to the hyperref
36283 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36290 for a full list and documentation of possible options).
36291 Note that these options will be passed to hyperref via
36292 \begin_inset Flex Code
36295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36297 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656321
36307 , not via the package options.
36308 This will exclude some options that can only be specified via the latter.
36309 If you need to use one of those options, you can set them by adding
36312 \begin_layout Quote
36314 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656496
36317 PackageOptions hyperref option1,option1
36322 \begin_layout Standard
36324 \change_inserted -712698321 1644656431
36327 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36328 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36331 (but only if hyperref is not loaded by your document class).
36336 \begin_layout Standard
36338 \change_inserted -712698321 1644744249
36343 input widget allows you to insert PDF properties that are independent of
36344 the hyperref package and rely on some (rather new) \SpecialChar LaTeX
36346 This requires \SpecialChar LaTeX
36347 version 06/2022 at least (with earlier versions, input is
36349 The widget expects a comma-separated list of key-value options (such as
36352 pdfversion=1.7, lang=de-DE
36355 At the point of writing this, the list of options is still rather small
36356 and not very well documented (look for a file called
36358 documentmetadata-support.pdf
36360 ), but it is expected that in the future, rather fundamental PDF properties
36361 (such as structure tagging for accessibility reasons and different PDF
36362 standards such as PDF/A) can be set this way.
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36367 \change_deleted -712698321 1644656978
36368 PDF properties are also used in this document.
36369 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
36375 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
36376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36388 \begin_layout Section
36390 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36394 name "sec:TeX-Code"
36401 \begin_layout Subsection
36404 \begin_inset Index idx
36407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36415 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36417 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
36424 \begin_layout Standard
36425 As \SpecialChar LyX
36426 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
36427 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
36428 commands and constructs,
36431 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
36432 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
36433 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
36434 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36435 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
36436 cannot support all packages and
36440 \begin_layout Standard
36441 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
36442 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
36443 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
36447 Code box is created by the menu
36449 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36456 or by the toolbar button
36469 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
36477 \begin_layout Standard
36478 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
36480 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
36482 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
36486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36487 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
36492 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36499 , you can write the command part
36505 in a \SpecialChar TeX
36506 Code box before the word and the closing brace
36510 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
36511 Code box behind the word.
36512 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
36513 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
36517 \begin_layout Standard
36518 \begin_inset Graphics
36519 filename clipart/ERT.png
36527 \begin_layout Standard
36531 \begin_layout Standard
36532 This is a line with a
36536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36559 \begin_layout Standard
36560 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36568 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36569 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
36570 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36571 know that the command is finished.
36579 \begin_layout Subsection
36580 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36582 \begin_inset Argument 1
36585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36586 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
36593 \begin_inset Index idx
36596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36606 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36613 \begin_layout Standard
36614 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
36615 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36616 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
36617 uses in the background.
36618 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
36619 is based on commands, you can
36620 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36628 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
36629 any time if you know the right commands.
36630 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
36631 is the end of the day.
36632 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
36633 all caption labels bold.
36634 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
36636 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
36640 \begin_layout Standard
36641 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36643 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36645 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36648 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36658 \begin_layout Standard
36659 As result you find that the package
36664 \begin_inset Index idx
36667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36675 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36677 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36680 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36684 \begin_inset space ~
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36697 usepackage[options]{package name}
36700 \begin_layout Standard
36701 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36702 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
36703 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36704 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36708 In your case the package name is
36713 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
36718 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36719 So you add the command
36722 \begin_layout Standard
36727 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36730 \begin_layout Standard
36731 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36736 For more commands provided by the
36740 package, have a look at its documentation,
36741 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36756 \begin_layout Standard
36757 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
36759 For example if you use a
36763 class, you don't need the package
36767 , you can instead write
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36775 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36780 \begin_layout Standard
36781 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36782 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
36783 documentation of the document class you want to use.
36790 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36793 \begin_layout Standard
36794 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
36795 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
36797 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36798 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
36799 Code box as described in the previous
36803 \begin_layout Standard
36804 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36805 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36808 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36810 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36818 \begin_layout Standard
36819 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36825 \begin_layout Standard
36829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36839 \begin_inset Note Note
36842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36843 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36851 \begin_layout Left Header
36852 \begin_inset Argument 1
36855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36875 \begin_inset Note Note
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 defines the header line as described below
36887 \begin_layout Center Header
36888 \begin_inset Argument 1
36891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36900 \begin_layout Right Header
36901 \begin_inset Argument 1
36904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36925 \begin_layout Left Footer
36926 \begin_inset Argument 1
36929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36950 \begin_layout Center Footer
36951 \begin_inset Argument 1
36954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36966 \begin_inset Newline newline
36970 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36976 \begin_layout Right Footer
36977 \begin_inset Argument 1
36980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37002 \begin_layout Section
37003 Customized Page Headers and Footers
37004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37006 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
37011 \begin_inset Index idx
37014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37015 Document ! Header/Footer line
37021 \begin_inset Index idx
37024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37033 \begin_layout Standard
37034 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
37038 \begin_inset space ~
37049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37055 \begin_inset space ~
37061 As a second step add in the menu
37063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37064 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37073 Custom Header/Footerlines
37076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37080 This module offers the following 6
37081 \begin_inset space ~
37087 \begin_layout Description
37089 \begin_inset space ~
37093 \begin_inset space ~
37097 \begin_inset space ~
37101 \begin_inset space ~
37105 \begin_inset space ~
37111 \begin_layout Description
37113 \begin_inset space ~
37117 \begin_inset space ~
37121 \begin_inset space ~
37125 \begin_inset space ~
37129 \begin_inset space ~
37135 \begin_layout Standard
37136 for the different positions in the header/footer.
37137 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
37140 \begin_layout Standard
37141 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
37142 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37150 reference "fig:Page-layout"
37154 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
37157 \begin_layout Standard
37158 \begin_inset Float figure
37165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37168 \begin_inset Tabular
37169 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
37170 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
37171 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37172 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37173 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
37175 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
37187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37193 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37204 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37222 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37233 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
37236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37237 The normal text on the page goes here.
37238 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
37240 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
37241 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
37246 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37255 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37266 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
37278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37284 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37295 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
37298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
37307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37313 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
37316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37331 \begin_inset Caption Standard
37333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37334 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37336 name "fig:Page-layout"
37340 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
37353 \begin_layout Standard
37354 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37362 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37371 is set to “Default”.
37372 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
37381 \begin_layout Subsection
37385 \begin_layout Standard
37386 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
37387 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
37388 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
37389 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
37391 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
37393 Defining the footer line works similarly.
37396 \begin_layout Standard
37397 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
37398 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
37402 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37404 \begin_inset space ~
37412 \begin_layout Description
37415 thepage prints the current page number
37418 \begin_layout Description
37421 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
37424 \begin_layout Description
37427 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
37430 \begin_layout Description
37433 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
37434 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
37437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37441 \begin_inset Quotes prd
37444 because it usually goes in a left header.
37447 \begin_layout Description
37450 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37451 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
37453 It is normally used in the right header.
37456 \begin_layout Subsection
37457 Default header/footer
37460 \begin_layout Standard
37461 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37462 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
37463 footer has the page number.
37464 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
37465 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
37466 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
37469 \begin_inset space ~
37477 \begin_layout Subsection
37481 \begin_layout Standard
37482 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37483 Some pages are different.
37484 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
37485 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37486 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
37487 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
37488 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37491 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37492 Header and footer decoration line
37495 \begin_layout Standard
37496 By default, you get a 0.4
37497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37500 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37501 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37513 in the following way:
37516 \begin_layout Standard
37523 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37526 \begin_layout Standard
37527 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37540 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
37541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37547 \begin_layout Standard
37548 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37550 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
37551 \begin_inset space ~
37555 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37565 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37566 Several header/footer lines
37569 \begin_layout Standard
37570 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
37571 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37572 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
37574 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37592 \begin_inset space ~
37600 \begin_layout Standard
37607 headheight}{height}
37610 \begin_layout Standard
37615 is a size in standard units (e.
37616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37620 \begin_inset space \space{}
37628 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
37629 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37630 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37631 logfile with the menu
37633 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37635 \begin_inset space ~
37643 \begin_inset space ~
37648 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37653 \begin_inset Index idx
37656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37658 packages ! fancyhdr
37664 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
37665 for your header/footer.
37668 \begin_layout Subsection
37672 \begin_layout Standard
37673 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37674 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37675 This example consists of the following definition:
37678 \begin_layout Description
37680 \begin_inset space ~
37689 , empty optional argument
37692 \begin_layout Description
37694 \begin_inset space ~
37697 Header empty, empty optional argument
37700 \begin_layout Description
37702 \begin_inset space ~
37711 in the optional argument
37714 \begin_layout Description
37716 \begin_inset space ~
37725 in the optional argument
37728 \begin_layout Description
37730 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37747 \begin_inset Newline newline
37751 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37758 in the optional argument
37761 \begin_layout Description
37763 \begin_inset space ~
37772 , empty optional argument
37775 \begin_layout Description
37778 headrulewidth set to 2
37779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37785 \begin_layout Standard
37786 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
37787 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
37793 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37803 \begin_layout Standard
37804 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37810 \begin_layout Standard
37814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37818 pagestyle{headings}
37824 \begin_inset Note Note
37827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37828 switches back to page style with the default headings
37836 \begin_layout Section
37837 Previewing Snippets of your Document
37838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37840 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37845 \begin_inset Index idx
37848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37855 \begin_inset Index idx
37858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37867 \begin_layout Standard
37869 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
37870 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
37871 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37874 \begin_layout Subsection
37878 \begin_layout Standard
37879 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37885 \begin_inset Index idx
37888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37890 packages ! preview-latex
37895 (on some systems named simply
37900 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37902 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37909 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37911 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37919 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
37920 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37921 -package are automatically
37922 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37926 \begin_layout Subsection
37930 \begin_layout Standard
37931 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37932 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37934 activate the option
37937 \begin_inset space ~
37944 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37950 \begin_inset space ~
37954 \begin_inset space ~
37957 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37964 \begin_inset space ~
37977 \begin_inset space ~
37982 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37985 \begin_layout Standard
37986 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37991 \begin_inset space ~
37999 \begin_inset space ~
38007 \begin_layout Standard
38008 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
38009 and when you finish
38013 \begin_layout Standard
38014 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38022 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
38023 generated by activating the option
38026 \begin_inset space ~
38032 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
38040 \begin_layout Subsection
38041 Selected document parts
38044 \begin_layout Standard
38045 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
38046 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
38047 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
38048 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38050 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
38052 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38056 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
38057 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
38058 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
38061 \begin_layout Standard
38062 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38069 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38081 is explained in section
38083 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
38088 \begin_inset space ~
38098 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
38099 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
38100 the final rotated boxes,
38101 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
38102 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
38104 Here is the result:
38107 \begin_layout Standard
38108 \begin_inset Preview
38110 \begin_layout Standard
38115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38119 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
38125 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
38135 height_special "totalheight"
38140 backgroundcolor "none"
38143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38168 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
38174 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
38181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38196 \begin_layout Standard
38197 Previewing works also for colors.
38198 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38217 is explained in section
38224 \begin_inset space ~
38237 \begin_layout Standard
38238 \begin_inset Preview
38240 \begin_layout Standard
38244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38263 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
38268 This is text within a colored, framed box.
38272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38287 \begin_layout Standard
38288 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
38294 \begin_layout Standard
38295 If \SpecialChar LyX
38296 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
38297 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
38298 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
38299 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38300 packages in your document preamble that are required by
38301 the \SpecialChar TeX
38303 If \SpecialChar LyX
38304 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
38305 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
38307 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
38308 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
38309 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
38312 \begin_layout Subsection
38317 \begin_layout Standard
38318 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38319 source of the whole document or parts of it.
38322 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
38324 \begin_inset space ~
38329 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38331 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
38333 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
38334 's main window, then only this selection
38335 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
38336 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
38337 the source view window.
38342 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
38343 ; but note that if you have
38344 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
38346 not just the one which is open at the time.
38349 \begin_layout Section
38350 Advanced Find and Replace
38351 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38353 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38358 \begin_inset Index idx
38361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38368 \begin_inset Index idx
38371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38380 \begin_layout Subsection
38384 \begin_layout Standard
38385 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
38386 allows for searching of complex,
38387 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
38389 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38390 The key-features are:
38393 \begin_layout Itemize
38394 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
38395 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
38396 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
38400 \begin_layout Itemize
38401 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
38402 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
38403 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
38404 a section heading will only be found within section headings
38407 \begin_layout Itemize
38408 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
38409 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
38410 outside of mathematics environments
38413 \begin_layout Itemize
38414 Search may be widened to a specific
38419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38423 \begin_inset space ~
38426 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38427 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
38434 \begin_layout Itemize
38435 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
38436 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38444 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38447 \begin_layout Subsection
38451 \begin_layout Standard
38452 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38467 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38470 ) or the toolbar button
38473 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38479 Advanced Find and Replace
38484 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38488 \begin_layout Standard
38494 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
38498 \begin_inset space ~
38503 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38506 arg "paragraph-break"
38510 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
38511 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38515 arg "paragraph-break"
38518 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38522 searches backwards.
38525 \begin_layout Standard
38529 \begin_inset space ~
38534 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38543 \begin_inset space ~
38548 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38551 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38552 Searching for mathematics
38555 \begin_layout Standard
38556 Mathematical formulas, such as
38557 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38560 or something more complex like
38561 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38564 , may be searched for by typing them in the
38569 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
38570 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38571 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38572 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38578 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38582 \begin_layout Standard
38583 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38584 This is done by switching to the
38588 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38593 This way, entering in the
38600 \begin_layout Itemize
38601 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
38602 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38605 \begin_layout Itemize
38606 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
38607 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
38610 \begin_layout Itemize
38611 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
38612 of it only within section headings.
38613 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
38614 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
38618 \begin_layout Itemize
38619 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
38620 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38623 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38627 \begin_layout Standard
38628 The entries made in the
38632 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38635 \begin_inset space ~
38641 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
38645 button or alternatively press
38648 arg "paragraph-break"
38655 while the cursor is in the
38658 \begin_inset space ~
38666 \begin_layout Standard
38667 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38669 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
38673 \begin_layout Itemize
38674 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
38675 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38683 with its typewriter version
38684 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38692 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38698 \begin_layout Itemize
38699 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
38701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38705 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38717 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38724 (you may want to enable the
38727 \begin_inset space ~
38735 \begin_inset space ~
38740 options and disable the
38748 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
38749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38756 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
38757 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38761 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38764 , or occurrences of
38765 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38769 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38775 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38779 \begin_layout Standard
38780 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38785 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38787 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38789 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38799 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
38805 This is done with the context menu
38807 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38808 Insert Regular Expression
38810 while the cursor is in the
38815 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
38816 expression matching rules
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38821 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38824 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38828 \begin_inset space ~
38831 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38832 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
38838 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
38839 same text in the document.
38840 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38841 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38844 \begin_layout Enumerate
38845 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
38850 editor the fraction
38851 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38855 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38858 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
38859 fractions with the given denominator.
38862 \begin_layout Enumerate
38863 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after
38864 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390777
38868 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390710
38871 'Adhere to search string formatting of'
38872 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651390724
38878 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651390961
38879 and the 'Select all'
38888 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38893 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
38894 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38895 Also, by inserting a
38896 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38899 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38900 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38902 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391772
38903 The meaning of the specific style options (if checked) is as follows:
38907 \begin_layout Description
38909 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651391862
38910 Language Allows searching for text in specific language
38913 \begin_layout Description
38915 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392163
38917 \begin_inset space ~
38920 color colored text like cyan, yellow, etc
38923 \begin_layout Description
38925 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392038
38927 \begin_inset space ~
38930 family Roman, Sans serif, Typewriter
38933 \begin_layout Description
38935 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392204
38937 \begin_inset space ~
38944 \begin_layout Description
38946 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392249
38948 \begin_inset space ~
38952 upright, italic, ...
38955 \begin_layout Description
38957 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392299
38959 \begin_inset space ~
38966 \begin_layout Description
38968 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392343
38969 Emph/noun Semantic Markup: Emphasized, Noun
38972 \begin_layout Description
38974 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392414
38976 Single, Double, Wawy
38979 \begin_layout Description
38981 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392503
38982 Strike-through Single, With '/'
38985 \begin_layout Description
38987 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392776
38988 Deletion searches also in deleted parts (in case of 'Track Changes' enabled)
38991 \begin_layout Description
38993 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651392891
38995 \begin_inset space ~
38999 title, part, chapter, section, ...
39004 \begin_layout Standard
39005 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
39006 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
39007 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39010 , and referring back to them through
39011 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39015 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
39019 For example, try searching with the regexp
39020 \begin_inset Newline newline
39024 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393222
39036 \change_deleted 1549938239 1651393089
39037 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
39042 \begin_inset Newline newline
39045 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
39048 \begin_layout Standard
39049 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet)
39050 \change_inserted 1549938239 1651393403
39056 \begin_layout Standard
39057 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
39060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39065 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
39066 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
39067 sub-expressions is absolute.
39069 \begin_inset space ~
39073 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
39076 always refers to the first occurrence of
39077 \begin_inset Formula $()$
39080 in all entered regexps.
39088 \begin_layout Section
39090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39092 name "sec:Spellchecking"
39097 \begin_inset Index idx
39100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39109 \begin_layout Standard
39111 has a built-in spell checker.
39114 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39121 key or the toolbar button
39124 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
39127 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
39128 beginning of the currently selected text.
39129 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
39130 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
39131 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
39132 scrolled so that it is visible.
39133 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
39134 n, if any could be found.
39135 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
39139 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
39140 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
39143 \begin_layout Standard
39144 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
39147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39151 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
39152 a different one at the top of the dialog.
39154 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
39155 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
39158 \begin_inset space ~
39166 arg "dialog-show character"
39169 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
39171 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
39174 \begin_layout Standard
39175 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
39176 can be downloaded from here:
39177 \begin_inset Newline newline
39181 \begin_inset Flex URL
39184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39186 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069762
39188 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
39189 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069762
39190 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/dicts/
39198 \begin_inset Newline newline
39202 \change_deleted 244031559 1606070170
39204 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070176
39205 You should download
39208 \begin_inset space ~
39211 files for each language
39212 \change_inserted 244031559 1606070127
39217 link at the end of the opened webpage)
39220 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the
39221 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069925
39225 \begin_inset space ~
39228 files into \SpecialChar LyX
39229 's installation subfolder
39237 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39239 \begin_inset Newline newline
39242 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
39243 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
39244 but in most cases these are
39260 is the language code.
39263 \begin_layout Subsection
39267 \begin_layout Standard
39270 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39271 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39273 \begin_inset space ~
39276 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39279 you can set the following things:
39282 \begin_layout Description
39284 \begin_inset space ~
39287 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
39288 should use for spell checking.
39289 Depending on your platform,
39299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39300 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
39301 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39319 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
39322 \begin_layout Description
39324 \begin_inset space ~
39327 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
39328 will always use the given language
39329 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
39332 \begin_layout Description
39334 \begin_inset space ~
39337 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
39339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39343 \begin_inset space \space{}
39347 This should normally not be needed.
39350 \begin_layout Description
39352 \begin_inset space ~
39356 \begin_inset space ~
39359 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
39361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39371 \begin_layout Description
39373 \begin_inset space ~
39376 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
39377 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
39378 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
39379 appear in a context menu.
39380 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
39384 \begin_layout Description
39386 \begin_inset space ~
39390 \begin_inset space ~
39394 \begin_inset space ~
39397 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
39401 \begin_layout Section
39403 \begin_inset Index idx
39406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39413 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39415 name "sec:Thesaurus"
39422 \begin_layout Standard
39424 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
39425 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
39434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39435 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39437 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
39447 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
39449 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
39450 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
39451 which are available for many languages.
39454 \begin_layout Standard
39455 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
39456 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
39460 \begin_layout Subsection
39461 Setting up the thesaurus
39464 \begin_layout Standard
39473 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
39477 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39482 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
39484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39488 \begin_inset space ~
39496 For instance, the US English files are named:
39499 \begin_layout Itemize
39503 \begin_layout Itemize
39507 \begin_layout Standard
39516 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
39517 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39520 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39521 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39522 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39524 \begin_inset space ~
39529 ) to the path where they are installed.
39533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39534 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
39535 ies, typical locations are
39541 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39545 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39549 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39552 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
39558 LibreOffice-<Version>
39565 On the Mac, the default location is
39567 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39568 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39569 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39570 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39571 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39572 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39580 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
39581 during the \SpecialChar LyX
39582 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
39586 \begin_layout Standard
39587 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39589 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069849
39591 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069853
39594 thesaurus dictionaries, you can download them from here:
39595 \begin_inset Newline newline
39599 \begin_inset Flex URL
39602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39604 \change_deleted 244031559 1606069803
39606 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39607 \change_inserted 244031559 1606069803
39608 https://www.lyx.org/trac/export/HEAD/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
39618 \begin_layout Standard
39619 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
39620 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39622 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39623 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39624 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39626 \begin_inset space ~
39631 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39633 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
39634 and point \SpecialChar LyX
39638 \begin_layout Standard
39639 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
39641 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39644 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
39650 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39653 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39654 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39662 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39663 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39664 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39666 \begin_inset space ~
39671 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39674 \begin_layout Subsection
39675 Using the thesaurus
39678 \begin_layout Standard
39679 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
39681 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39684 or the toolbar button
39687 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39690 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
39692 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
39694 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39695 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
39696 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
39705 ), related terms (such as
39708 \begin_inset space ~
39717 ), compounds (such as
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39729 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39738 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39741 \begin_layout Standard
39742 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
39743 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
39747 \begin_layout Standard
39748 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
39749 the dictionary, such as the above
39753 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
39754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39758 \begin_inset space \space{}
39761 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
39762 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
39763 For example, looking up the word form
39767 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
39772 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39773 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39777 \begin_inset space \space{}
39788 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
39789 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
39790 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
39793 \begin_layout Section
39795 \begin_inset Index idx
39798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39805 \begin_inset Index idx
39808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39809 Document ! Change Tracking
39815 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39817 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39824 \begin_layout Standard
39825 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
39826 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39827 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39828 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39832 \begin_inset space ~
39835 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39837 \begin_inset space ~
39845 \begin_layout Standard
39846 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39860 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39861 You can change the color in
39863 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39864 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39866 \begin_inset space ~
39870 \begin_inset space ~
39875 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39881 \begin_inset Index idx
39884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39885 Color ! Change tracking
39890 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39891 's status bar when the
39892 cursor is in changed text.
39893 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39896 arg "changes-merge"
39902 \begin_layout Standard
39903 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39905 \begin_inset Index idx
39908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39917 \begin_layout Standard
39918 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39924 \begin_layout Standard
39925 \begin_inset Graphics
39926 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39934 \begin_layout Standard
39935 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39941 \begin_layout Standard
39942 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39945 \begin_layout Standard
39946 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39952 \begin_layout Standard
39953 \begin_inset Tabular
39954 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39955 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39956 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39957 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39958 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39967 arg "changes-track"
39975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39981 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39983 \begin_inset space ~
39986 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39988 \begin_inset space ~
39997 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40006 arg "changes-output"
40014 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40020 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40022 \begin_inset space ~
40025 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40031 \begin_inset space ~
40035 \begin_inset space ~
40044 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40045 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40065 Jumps to the next change
40071 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40080 arg "change-accept"
40088 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40094 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40099 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40110 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40119 arg "change-reject"
40127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40133 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40135 \begin_inset space ~
40138 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40140 \begin_inset space ~
40149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40158 arg "changes-merge"
40166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40172 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40174 \begin_inset space ~
40177 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40179 \begin_inset space ~
40188 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40189 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40197 arg "all-changes-accept"
40205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40213 \begin_inset space ~
40216 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40218 \begin_inset space ~
40222 \begin_inset space ~
40231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40240 arg "all-changes-reject"
40248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40254 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40259 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40265 \begin_inset space ~
40274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40297 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40298 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40300 \begin_inset space ~
40309 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40332 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40334 \begin_inset space ~
40350 \begin_layout Standard
40351 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40357 \begin_layout Standard
40358 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
40378 \begin_layout Standard
40379 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
40380 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
40381 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
40382 the next change after the current cursor position.
40383 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
40384 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
40385 step to the next change.
40386 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
40389 \begin_layout Standard
40390 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
40391 to describe a change.
40394 \begin_layout Standard
40396 \change_deleted -712698321 1577206802
40397 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40403 \begin_inset Index idx
40406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40414 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40416 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40423 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40429 \begin_layout Section
40430 Comparison of Documents
40431 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40433 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40438 \begin_inset Index idx
40441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40442 Comparison of documents
40450 \begin_layout Standard
40451 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40454 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40458 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40459 file with change tracking enabled showing the
40461 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40463 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40475 \begin_inset space ~
40484 \begin_inset space ~
40488 \begin_inset space ~
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40500 \begin_inset space ~
40504 \begin_inset space ~
40509 enables the change tracking option
40512 \begin_inset space ~
40516 \begin_inset space ~
40520 \begin_inset space ~
40525 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40528 \begin_layout Section
40529 International Support
40530 \begin_inset Index idx
40533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40534 International support
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40544 with any language you want.
40545 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
40546 up \SpecialChar LyX
40548 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40550 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
40560 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
40561 \begin_inset space ~
40565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40567 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40574 \begin_layout Subsection
40576 \begin_inset Index idx
40579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40586 \begin_inset Index idx
40589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40590 Document ! Settings
40596 \begin_inset Index idx
40599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40600 Document ! Language
40608 \begin_layout Standard
40611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40612 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40615 dialog lets you set
40617 the language, the quote style and character encoding
40622 \begin_layout Standard
40627 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40632 \begin_inset space ~
40637 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40638 For details about the different encoding options see section
40639 \begin_inset space ~
40643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40645 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40652 \begin_layout Subsection
40653 Keyboard mapping configuration
40654 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40656 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40663 \begin_layout Standard
40664 If you have for example a U.
40665 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40668 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
40669 can use an alternate keymap.
40670 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40675 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40676 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40677 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40680 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40685 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40687 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40692 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
40693 which one you want to use.
40696 \begin_layout Standard
40697 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
40698 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
40699 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
40700 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40703 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40704 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
40705 one to support the characters you want.
40706 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40713 \begin_layout Chapter
40716 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40718 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40725 \begin_layout Standard
40726 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40727 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
40728 topic inside the user's guide.
40731 \begin_layout Section
40733 \begin_inset Index idx
40736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40745 \begin_layout Standard
40750 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40753 \begin_layout Subsection
40757 \begin_layout Standard
40758 Creates a new document.
40761 \begin_layout Subsection
40765 \begin_layout Standard
40766 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40767 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
40768 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40770 \change_inserted -712698321 1553353209
40771 Furthermore, templates can provide text structures and fragments for recurring
40777 \begin_layout Subsection
40781 \begin_layout Standard
40785 \begin_layout Subsection
40789 \begin_layout Standard
40790 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40791 Click there on a file to open it.
40794 \begin_layout Subsection
40796 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352812
40800 \begin_layout Standard
40802 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352848
40803 This menu entry gives you quick access to all \SpecialChar LyX
40807 \begin_layout Subsection
40811 \begin_layout Standard
40812 Closes the current document.
40815 \begin_layout Subsection
40819 \begin_layout Standard
40820 Closes all opened documents.
40823 \begin_layout Subsection
40827 \begin_layout Standard
40828 Saves the actual document.
40831 \begin_layout Subsection
40835 \begin_layout Standard
40836 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40837 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352868
40841 \begin_layout Subsection
40843 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352875
40847 \begin_layout Standard
40849 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352904
40850 Saves the document in the appropriate templates directory for later use
40856 \begin_layout Subsection
40860 \begin_layout Standard
40861 Saves all opened documents.
40864 \begin_layout Subsection
40868 \begin_layout Standard
40869 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40872 \begin_layout Subsection
40876 \begin_layout Standard
40877 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
40878 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40879 It is described in the section
40881 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40886 Additional Features
40891 \begin_layout Subsection
40895 \begin_layout Standard
40896 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40897 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
40899 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
40900 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40904 \begin_layout Standard
40905 When using the menu entry
40908 \begin_inset space ~
40913 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
40917 \begin_inset space ~
40921 \begin_inset space ~
40925 \begin_inset space ~
40930 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40931 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40934 \begin_layout Subsection
40936 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40938 name "subsec:Export"
40945 \begin_layout Standard
40946 You can export your document to various file formats.
40947 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40949 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40950 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40951 during its configuration.
40954 \begin_layout Standard
40955 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
40957 \begin_inset space ~
40961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40963 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40970 \begin_layout Description
40976 \begin_inset space ~
40979 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40984 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40985 \begin_inset Newline newline
40988 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40989 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40993 \begin_layout Description
40994 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
41000 \begin_layout Description
41002 \begin_inset space ~
41005 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
41011 \begin_layout Description
41012 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
41013 's native DVI-format.
41014 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
41015 files paths or file names in your document.
41017 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
41024 \begin_layout Description
41025 DVI DVI-format that also allows the usage of special characters or spaces
41026 in files paths or file names
41029 \begin_layout Description
41031 \begin_inset space ~
41038 ) DVI-format using the program
41040 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41043 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
41047 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41055 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
41063 \begin_layout Description
41065 \begin_inset space ~
41068 (cropped) the same as
41072 but with cropped page margins.
41075 \begin_layout Description
41077 \begin_inset space ~
41080 Dot text file with code in the programming language
41084 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
41089 \begin_layout Description
41093 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
41096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41101 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
41109 \begin_layout Description
41111 \begin_inset space ~
41115 \begin_inset space ~
41118 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
41122 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
41130 \begin_layout Description
41134 \begin_inset space ~
41143 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41144 source that is compilable with the program
41146 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41150 \begin_layout Description
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41159 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41160 source, additionally all images used in the document
41161 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
41165 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
41168 \begin_layout Description
41172 \begin_inset space ~
41177 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41178 source code, additionally all images used in the document
41179 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
41187 \begin_layout Description
41191 \begin_inset space ~
41200 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41201 source that is compilable with the program
41207 \begin_layout Description
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41213 \begin_inset space ~
41220 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41221 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
41227 \begin_layout Description
41229 \begin_inset space ~
41232 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
41233 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
41235 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41239 \begin_inset space \space{}
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41263 represent the version number)
41266 \begin_layout Description
41268 \begin_inset space ~
41272 \begin_inset space ~
41275 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
41276 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
41277 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41281 \begin_layout Description
41282 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
41283 's internal XHTML engine
41286 \begin_layout Description
41288 \begin_inset space ~
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41296 \begin_inset space ~
41300 \begin_inset space ~
41303 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
41308 For the conversion the program
41317 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41320 \begin_layout Description
41321 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
41326 \begin_layout Description
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41331 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
41333 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
41336 For the conversion the program
41345 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41348 \begin_layout Description
41350 \begin_inset space ~
41353 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
41354 For the conversion the program
41363 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41366 \begin_layout Description
41368 \begin_inset space ~
41371 (cropped) the same as
41374 \begin_inset space ~
41379 but with cropped page margins
41382 \begin_layout Description
41386 \begin_inset space ~
41391 PDF-format using the program
41395 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41398 \begin_layout Description
41402 \begin_inset space ~
41406 \begin_inset space ~
41414 \begin_inset space ~
41419 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41420 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41424 \begin_inset space \space{}
41427 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
41431 \begin_layout Description
41435 \begin_inset space ~
41440 PDF-format using the program
41442 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41445 , produces PDF-files directly
41448 \begin_layout Description
41452 \begin_inset space ~
41457 PDF-format using the program
41461 , produces PDF-files directly
41464 \begin_layout Description
41468 \begin_inset space ~
41473 PDF-format using the program
41477 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41480 \begin_layout Description
41484 \begin_inset space ~
41489 PDF-format using the program
41494 , produces PDF-files directly
41497 \begin_layout Description
41501 \begin_inset space ~
41509 \begin_layout Description
41513 \begin_inset space ~
41517 \begin_inset space ~
41522 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
41523 and then exported as text using the program
41528 \begin_layout Description
41533 PostScript format using the program
41541 options see section
41542 \begin_inset space ~
41546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41548 reference "subsec:General-output"
41555 \begin_layout Description
41556 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41557 source and also code in the statistical programming
41571 it is possible to use
41575 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41579 \begin_layout Standard
41580 If one of the menu entries
41587 \begin_inset space ~
41596 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41598 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41600 \begin_inset space ~
41604 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41606 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41611 \begin_inset Index idx
41614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41615 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
41624 \begin_layout Subsection
41628 \begin_layout Standard
41629 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
41630 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41633 \begin_inset space ~
41637 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41639 reference "sec:Paths"
41644 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41653 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41654 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41655 's preferences as described in section
41656 \begin_inset space ~
41660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41662 reference "subsec:Converters"
41669 \begin_layout Subsection
41670 New and Close Window
41673 \begin_layout Standard
41674 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41678 \begin_layout Subsection
41682 \begin_layout Standard
41683 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41686 \begin_layout Section
41688 \begin_inset Index idx
41691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41700 \begin_layout Subsection
41704 \begin_layout Standard
41705 Described in section
41706 \begin_inset space ~
41710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41712 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41719 \begin_layout Subsection
41720 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
41723 \begin_layout Standard
41724 Described in section
41725 \begin_inset space ~
41729 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41731 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41738 \begin_layout Subsection
41742 \begin_layout Standard
41743 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41744 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
41747 \begin_layout Subsection
41751 \begin_layout Standard
41752 Selects the whole document.
41755 \begin_layout Subsection
41756 Find & Replace (Quick)
41759 \begin_layout Standard
41760 Described in section
41761 \begin_inset space ~
41765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41767 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41774 \begin_layout Subsection
41775 Find & Replace (Advanced)
41778 \begin_layout Standard
41779 Described in section
41780 \begin_inset space ~
41784 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41786 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41793 \begin_layout Subsection
41794 Move Paragraph Up/Down
41797 \begin_layout Standard
41798 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
41802 \begin_layout Subsection
41804 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41808 \begin_layout Standard
41810 \change_deleted -712698321 1525756612
41811 Described in section
41812 \begin_inset space ~
41816 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41818 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41827 \begin_layout Subsection
41829 \begin_inset Index idx
41832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41833 Paragraph ! Settings
41841 \begin_layout Standard
41842 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
41843 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
41847 \begin_layout Standard
41848 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
41849 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41855 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41856 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41858 \begin_inset space ~
41864 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756614
41868 \begin_layout Subsection
41870 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756624
41874 \begin_layout Standard
41876 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41877 This sub-menu provides several ways to customize the appearance of text
41882 \begin_layout Enumerate
41884 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756657
41885 Customize text properties by means of the
41891 Customize\SpecialChar ldots
41894 ; this is described in section
41895 \begin_inset space ~
41899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41901 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41908 \begin_layout Enumerate
41910 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756942
41911 Apply the last settings done in this dialog via
41913 Apply last settings
41916 \begin_layout Enumerate
41918 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756615
41919 Change the casing of selected text (
41934 \begin_layout Subsection
41936 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756641
41940 \begin_layout Standard
41942 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41943 This sub-menu only appears
41944 \change_inserted 630872221 1621860799
41946 \change_inserted -712698321 1525756787
41947 the document class or a module provides custom text styles (in the case
41970 \begin_inset space ~
41974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41976 reference "subsec:Custom-Character-Styles"
41985 \begin_layout Subsection
41986 Table and Rows & Columns
41989 \begin_layout Standard
41990 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41991 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
41992 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41995 \begin_layout Subsection
41999 \begin_layout Standard
42000 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
42001 It will dissolve this inset.
42002 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
42006 \begin_layout Subsection
42010 \begin_layout Standard
42011 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
42012 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
42015 \begin_layout Subsection
42016 Increase/Decrease List Depth
42019 \begin_layout Standard
42020 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
42022 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
42023 \begin_inset space ~
42027 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42029 reference "sec:Nesting"
42034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42036 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
42043 \begin_layout Section
42045 \begin_inset Index idx
42048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42057 \begin_layout Standard
42058 At the bottom of the
42062 menu the opened documents are listed.
42065 \begin_layout Subsection
42066 Open/Close all Insets
42069 \begin_layout Standard
42070 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
42073 \begin_layout Subsection
42074 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
42077 \begin_layout Standard
42078 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
42081 \begin_layout Standard
42082 Math macros are described in the
42089 \begin_layout Subsection
42093 \begin_layout Standard
42094 Shows the outline window as described in sections
42095 \begin_inset space ~
42099 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42101 reference "sec:Navigating"
42106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42108 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
42115 \begin_layout Subsection
42119 \begin_layout Standard
42120 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
42122 \begin_inset space ~
42126 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42128 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
42135 \begin_layout Subsection
42139 \begin_layout Standard
42140 Opens a window showing console messages.
42141 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
42143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42146 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
42147 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
42148 is processing the document.
42151 \begin_layout Subsection
42153 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42155 name "subsec:Toolbars"
42160 \begin_inset Index idx
42163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42172 \begin_layout Standard
42173 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different
42175 All toolbars and the
42178 \begin_inset space ~
42196 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
42198 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195495
42200 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195492
42204 \begin_layout Standard
42206 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195407
42210 \begin_inset space ~
42228 \begin_inset space ~
42240 \begin_inset space ~
42245 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
42248 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195728
42252 \change_inserted -712698321 1608196033
42254 The state of these toolbars is set and indicated in a submenu which lets
42268 \change_deleted -712698321 1608195563
42269 denoted in the menu with the suffix
42278 \begin_layout Standard
42283 state the toolbar is permanently shown
42284 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195803
42289 state it is never shown
42295 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
42296 or when a certain feature is enabled.
42297 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
42298 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
42299 is inside a formula or table respectively
42300 \change_inserted -712698321 1608195857
42301 , the phonetic symbols toolbar only in the phonetic symbols environment
42306 \begin_layout Standard
42308 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
42309 \begin_inset space ~
42313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42315 reference "sec:Toolbars"
42322 \begin_layout Subsection
42326 \begin_layout Standard
42330 \begin_inset space ~
42334 \begin_inset space ~
42338 \begin_inset space ~
42342 \begin_inset space ~
42346 \begin_inset space ~
42350 \begin_inset space ~
42355 will split \SpecialChar LyX
42356 's main window vertically while
42359 \begin_inset space ~
42363 \begin_inset space ~
42367 \begin_inset space ~
42371 \begin_inset space ~
42375 \begin_inset space ~
42379 \begin_inset space ~
42384 will split it horizontally.
42385 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
42386 to view the same document, but at different positions.
42387 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
42388 three or more documents at the same time.
42389 To close a split view, use the menu
42392 \begin_inset space ~
42396 \begin_inset space ~
42404 \begin_layout Subsection
42408 \begin_layout Standard
42409 Closes a split view.
42412 \begin_layout Subsection
42416 \begin_layout Standard
42417 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
42418 so that you will see nothing but your text.
42419 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
42420 's main window fullscreen.
42421 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
42422 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
42425 \begin_layout Section
42427 \begin_inset Index idx
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42439 \begin_layout Subsection
42443 \begin_layout Standard
42444 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
42445 \begin_inset space ~
42449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42451 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
42462 \begin_layout Subsection
42464 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42466 name "subsec:Special-Character"
42473 \begin_layout Standard
42474 Here you can insert the following characters:
42477 \begin_layout Description
42482 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
42485 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42486 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42487 -packages you have installed.
42488 You can get a complete display by checking
42491 \begin_inset space ~
42497 \begin_inset Newline newline
42501 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42509 Not all characters will be visible in the
42513 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
42514 dialog (see section
42515 \begin_inset space ~
42519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42521 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42525 ) can display every character.
42533 \begin_layout Description
42534 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
42538 \begin_layout Description
42540 \begin_inset space ~
42544 \begin_inset space ~
42547 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42548 \begin_inset space ~
42552 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42554 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42561 \begin_layout Description
42563 \begin_inset space ~
42566 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
42569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42570 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42576 \begin_layout Description
42578 \begin_inset space ~
42581 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42584 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42585 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42591 \begin_layout Description
42593 \begin_inset space ~
42596 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42600 \begin_layout Description
42602 \begin_inset space ~
42605 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
42609 \begin_layout Description
42611 \begin_inset space ~
42615 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482504
42616 Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing
42622 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42627 Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42629 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42633 \begin_inset space \space{}
42636 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42637 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42646 To insert a fraction use the command
42651 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42655 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42664 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42671 \begin_layout Description
42673 \begin_inset space ~
42676 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
42680 \begin_layout Description
42682 \begin_inset space ~
42686 \begin_inset Index idx
42689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42696 \begin_inset Index idx
42699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42700 Language ! Phonetic symbols
42705 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
42706 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
42708 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42714 \begin_inset Index idx
42717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42725 \begin_inset Newline newline
42728 More information about this feature can be found in the
42734 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42740 \begin_layout Description
42741 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42743 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
42744 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42748 \begin_layout Subsection
42752 \begin_layout Standard
42753 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42756 \begin_layout Description
42757 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
42758 \begin_inset script superscript
42760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42769 \begin_layout Description
42770 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
42771 \begin_inset script subscript
42773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42782 \begin_layout Description
42784 \begin_inset space ~
42787 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42788 \begin_inset space ~
42792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42794 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42801 \begin_layout Description
42803 \begin_inset space ~
42806 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42807 \begin_inset space ~
42811 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42813 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42820 \begin_layout Description
42822 \begin_inset space ~
42825 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42826 \begin_inset space ~
42830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42832 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42839 \begin_layout Description
42841 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482457
42843 \begin_inset space ~
42846 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42848 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42852 \begin_inset space \space{}
42855 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42856 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42865 To insert a fraction use the command
42870 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42874 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42883 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42892 \begin_layout Description
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42897 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42898 \begin_inset space ~
42902 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42904 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42911 \begin_layout Description
42913 \begin_inset space ~
42916 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42917 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42923 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42930 \begin_layout Description
42932 \begin_inset space ~
42935 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42936 \begin_inset space ~
42940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42942 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42949 \begin_layout Description
42950 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42951 \begin_inset space ~
42955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42957 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42964 \begin_layout Description
42966 \begin_inset space ~
42969 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42970 \begin_inset space ~
42974 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42976 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42983 \begin_layout Description
42985 \begin_inset space ~
42988 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42989 \begin_inset space ~
42993 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42995 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
43002 \begin_layout Description
43004 \begin_inset space ~
43008 \begin_inset space ~
43011 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
43014 \begin_inset space ~
43018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43020 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
43027 for a usage example.
43030 \begin_layout Description
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43036 \begin_inset space ~
43039 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
43040 \begin_inset space ~
43044 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43046 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43053 \begin_layout Description
43055 \begin_inset space ~
43058 Break Inserts a forced line break that
43059 \change_deleted -712698321 1590482910
43062 justifies the remaining text as described in section
43063 \begin_inset space ~
43067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43069 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
43076 \begin_layout Description
43078 \begin_inset space ~
43081 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
43082 \begin_inset space ~
43086 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43088 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43095 \begin_layout Description
43097 \begin_inset space ~
43100 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
43101 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
43103 \begin_inset space ~
43107 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43109 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
43114 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005731
43118 \begin_layout Description
43120 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43122 \begin_inset space ~
43126 \begin_inset space ~
43129 Break Instructs \SpecialChar LaTeX
43130 to prevent a page break at the given position.
43132 \begin_inset space ~
43136 \change_inserted 630872221 1621862329
43138 \begin_inset space ~
43142 \change_inserted -712698321 1607005924
43144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43146 reference "subsec:Suppressing-Page-Breaks"
43155 \begin_layout Description
43157 \begin_inset space ~
43160 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
43161 \begin_inset space ~
43165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43167 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43174 \begin_layout Description
43176 \begin_inset space ~
43180 \begin_inset space ~
43183 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43190 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
43197 \begin_layout Subsection
43199 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43203 \begin_layout Standard
43205 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43206 Here you can insert fields holding specific information.
43207 The submenu allows you to insert
43210 \begin_layout Description
43212 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43214 \begin_inset space ~
43217 (Current) inserts the current date (which will automatically update itself)
43220 \begin_layout Description
43222 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43224 \begin_inset space ~
43228 \begin_inset space ~
43231 Modification) inserts the date of the last file modification (time of last
43235 \begin_layout Description
43237 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43239 \begin_inset space ~
43242 (Fix) inserts a static date that will not change.
43245 \begin_layout Description
43247 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43249 \begin_inset space ~
43252 (Current) inserts the current time (which will automatically update itself)
43255 \begin_layout Description
43257 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43259 \begin_inset space ~
43263 \begin_inset space ~
43266 Modification) inserts the time of the last file modification (time of last
43270 \begin_layout Description
43272 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43274 \begin_inset space ~
43277 (Fix) inserts a static time that will not change.
43280 \begin_layout Description
43282 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867346
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43288 \begin_inset space ~
43292 \begin_inset space ~
43295 Extension) inserts the name of the current file (without the extension .lyx)
43298 \begin_layout Description
43300 \change_inserted 630872221 1621867469
43302 \begin_inset space ~
43306 \begin_inset space ~
43309 Revision inserts the version control reference number (e.g.
43311 This submenu does not appear if the file is not under version control
43314 \begin_layout Description
43316 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43318 \begin_inset space ~
43321 Name inserts the user name as specified in
43323 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43324 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43330 \begin_layout Description
43332 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43334 \begin_inset space ~
43337 Email inserts the user email address as specified in
43339 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43340 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43346 \begin_layout Description
43348 \change_inserted 630872221 1621866608
43349 Other\SpecialChar ldots
43350 opens a dialog that lets you insert alternative formats of the three
43351 date types listed above and insert a range of other information.
43354 \begin_layout Subsection
43357 List/Contents/References
43360 \begin_layout Standard
43361 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
43365 \begin_inset space ~
43386 are described in section
43387 \begin_inset space ~
43391 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43393 reference "sec:toc"
43402 is described in section
43403 \begin_inset space ~
43407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43409 reference "sec:Index"
43417 is described in section
43418 \begin_inset space ~
43422 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43424 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43430 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43433 is described in section
43434 \begin_inset space ~
43438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43440 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
43447 \begin_layout Subsection
43451 \begin_layout Standard
43452 To insert floats, as described in section
43453 \begin_inset space ~
43457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43459 reference "sec:Floats"
43463 and in detail the chapter
43470 \begin_inset space ~
43478 \begin_layout Subsection
43482 \begin_layout Standard
43483 To insert notes, described in section
43484 \begin_inset space ~
43488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43490 reference "sec:Notes"
43497 \begin_layout Subsection
43501 \begin_layout Standard
43502 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
43504 Branches are described in section
43505 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43511 reference "sec:Branches"
43518 \begin_layout Subsection
43522 \begin_layout Standard
43523 Inserts document class-specific insets.
43524 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
43526 An example is the document class
43527 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354540
43529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43537 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354543
43541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43546 with three custom insets.
43549 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43553 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
43559 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
43562 \begin_layout Subsection
43564 \begin_inset Index idx
43567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43576 \begin_layout Standard
43577 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
43579 For more information see chapter
43581 External Document Parts
43584 \begin_inset space ~
43590 \begin_layout Subsection
43592 \begin_inset Index idx
43595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43604 \begin_layout Standard
43605 Inserts a box in a certain style.
43606 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
43613 \begin_inset space ~
43621 \begin_layout Subsection
43625 \begin_layout Standard
43630 dialog as described in section
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43637 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43644 \begin_layout Subsection
43648 \begin_layout Standard
43653 as described in section
43654 \begin_inset space ~
43658 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43660 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43667 \begin_layout Subsection
43671 \begin_layout Standard
43676 as described in section
43677 \begin_inset space ~
43681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43683 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43690 \begin_layout Subsection
43692 \begin_inset Index idx
43695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43702 \begin_inset Index idx
43705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43706 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
43714 \begin_layout Standard
43715 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43716 Floats are described in section
43717 \begin_inset space ~
43721 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43723 reference "sec:Floats"
43727 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43730 \change_inserted -712698321 1590482693
43738 \begin_inset space ~
43746 \begin_layout Subsection
43750 \begin_layout Standard
43751 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43752 \begin_inset space ~
43756 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43758 reference "sec:Index"
43765 \begin_layout Subsection
43769 \begin_layout Standard
43770 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43771 \begin_inset space ~
43775 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43777 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43784 \begin_layout Subsection
43788 \begin_layout Standard
43789 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43790 Tables are described in section
43791 \begin_inset space ~
43795 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43797 reference "sec:Tables"
43801 and in detail in the chapter
43808 \begin_inset space ~
43816 \begin_layout Subsection
43820 \begin_layout Standard
43826 Graphics are described in section
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43833 reference "sec:Graphics"
43840 \begin_layout Subsection
43844 \begin_layout Standard
43845 Inserts a URL as described in section
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43852 reference "subsec:URLs"
43859 \begin_layout Subsection
43863 \begin_layout Standard
43864 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43865 \begin_inset space ~
43869 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43871 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43878 \begin_layout Subsection
43882 \begin_layout Standard
43883 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43884 \begin_inset space ~
43888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43890 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43897 \begin_layout Subsection
43901 \begin_layout Standard
43902 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43903 \begin_inset space ~
43907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43909 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43916 \begin_layout Subsection
43919 Separate <Name> (Above/Below)
43922 \begin_layout Standard
43923 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive
43924 environments of the same type.
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43930 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43932 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43936 for an explanation.
43939 \begin_layout Subsection
43943 \begin_layout Standard
43944 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
43945 title or caption of a float.
43946 Inserts a short title as described in section
43947 \begin_inset space ~
43951 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43953 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43960 \begin_layout Subsection
43965 \begin_layout Standard
43966 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43967 Code box as described in section
43968 \begin_inset space ~
43972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43974 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43981 \begin_layout Subsection
43983 \begin_inset Index idx
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43995 \begin_layout Standard
43996 Inserts a program listings box.
43997 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43999 Program Code Listings
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44012 \begin_layout Subsection
44014 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44018 \begin_layout Standard
44020 \change_deleted -712698321 1533459320
44021 Inserts the actual date.
44022 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
44029 \begin_layout Subsection
44033 \begin_layout Standard
44034 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
44035 \begin_inset space ~
44039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44041 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
44048 \begin_layout Section
44050 \begin_inset Index idx
44053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44062 \begin_layout Standard
44063 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44067 of the current document.
44068 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
44071 \begin_layout Subsection
44075 \begin_layout Standard
44076 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
44077 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
44078 to jump, for example, between section
44079 \begin_inset space ~
44083 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
44084 \begin_inset space ~
44087 2.5 and use the submenu
44090 \begin_inset space ~
44094 \begin_inset space ~
44101 \begin_inset space ~
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44117 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
44121 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
44127 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
44130 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
44133 \begin_layout Standard
44135 \change_deleted 244031559 1613377262
44136 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44147 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
44150 \begin_inset space ~
44155 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
44158 \begin_layout Subsection
44159 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
44162 \begin_layout Standard
44163 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
44167 \begin_layout Subsection
44171 \begin_layout Standard
44172 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
44173 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
44174 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
44178 \begin_inset space ~
44182 \begin_inset space ~
44190 \begin_layout Subsection
44194 \begin_layout Standard
44195 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
44198 The \SpecialChar LyX
44199 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
44201 \begin_inset space ~
44209 \begin_inset space ~
44214 manual for a detailed description.
44217 \begin_layout Section
44219 \begin_inset Index idx
44222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44231 \begin_layout Subsection
44235 \begin_layout Standard
44236 Change Tracking is described in section
44237 \begin_inset space ~
44241 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44243 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
44250 \begin_layout Subsection
44258 \begin_layout Standard
44259 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
44260 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
44261 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44263 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
44264 to the clipboard or update the view.
44265 \begin_inset Newline newline
44268 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44272 \begin_layout Standard
44275 Open Containing Directory
44277 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
44278 's temporary folder for the document.
44279 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
44280 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
44281 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
44282 For example some journals require to send the
44286 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44290 \begin_layout Subsection
44291 Start Appendix Here
44294 \begin_layout Standard
44295 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
44296 as described in section
44297 \begin_inset space ~
44301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44303 reference "sec:Appendices"
44310 \begin_layout Subsection
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44318 \begin_layout Standard
44319 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
44320 default output format for the document (menu
44322 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44323 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44324 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44326 \begin_inset space ~
44330 \begin_inset space ~
44336 \begin_inset space ~
44340 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44342 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44346 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
44349 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44350 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44352 \begin_inset space ~
44355 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44360 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44372 \begin_inset space ~
44376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44378 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44382 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
44383 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44385 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44386 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44388 \begin_inset space ~
44391 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44393 \begin_inset space ~
44396 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44400 \begin_inset space ~
44404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44406 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44411 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44412 when it is first configured.
44413 The default output format is
44416 \begin_inset space ~
44424 \begin_layout Subsection
44425 View (Other Formats)
44428 \begin_layout Standard
44429 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
44430 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
44431 actual document with an external program.
44432 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
44433 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44434 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
44436 All possible formats are listed in section
44437 \begin_inset space ~
44441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44443 reference "subsec:Export"
44448 You should at least see the menu entry
44453 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44455 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44457 \begin_inset space ~
44461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44463 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44468 \begin_inset Index idx
44471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44472 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44481 \begin_layout Standard
44482 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
44483 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44485 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44486 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44488 \begin_inset space ~
44491 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44493 \begin_inset space ~
44496 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44506 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44511 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44512 when it is first configured.
44515 \begin_layout Subsection
44517 \begin_inset space ~
44523 \begin_layout Standard
44524 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
44525 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
44528 \begin_layout Subsection
44529 Update (Other Formats)
44532 \begin_layout Standard
44533 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
44534 your document without opening a new viewer window.
44537 \begin_layout Subsection
44538 View Master Document
44541 \begin_layout Standard
44542 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44548 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44563 manual for more information on this topic).
44564 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
44565 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
44569 \begin_inset space ~
44573 \begin_inset space ~
44578 generates the output of the whole book, while
44582 will just output the chapter alone.
44585 \begin_layout Standard
44586 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44587 in the document settings (menu
44589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44591 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44593 \begin_inset space ~
44597 \begin_inset space ~
44603 \begin_inset space ~
44607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44609 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44613 ) or in the preferences (menu
44615 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44616 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44618 \begin_inset space ~
44621 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44623 \begin_inset space ~
44626 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44628 \begin_inset space ~
44632 \begin_inset space ~
44638 \begin_inset space ~
44642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44644 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44651 \begin_layout Subsection
44652 Update Master Document
44655 \begin_layout Standard
44656 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44672 \begin_inset space ~
44677 manual for more information on this topic).
44678 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
44679 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44682 \begin_layout Standard
44683 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
44684 in the document settings (menu
44686 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44687 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44688 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44690 \begin_inset space ~
44694 \begin_inset space ~
44700 \begin_inset space ~
44704 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44706 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44710 ) or in the preferences (menu
44712 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44713 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44715 \begin_inset space ~
44718 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44720 \begin_inset space ~
44723 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44725 \begin_inset space ~
44729 \begin_inset space ~
44735 \begin_inset space ~
44739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44741 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44748 \begin_layout Subsection
44750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44752 name "subsec:Compressed"
44759 \begin_layout Standard
44760 Un/compresses the current document.
44761 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
44762 compression (see the
44764 Additional Features
44766 manual for details).
44769 \begin_layout Subsection
44773 \begin_layout Standard
44774 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44777 \begin_layout Subsection
44781 \begin_layout Standard
44782 The document settings are described in appendix
44783 \begin_inset space ~
44787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44789 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44796 \begin_layout Section
44798 \begin_inset Index idx
44801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44810 \begin_layout Subsection
44814 \begin_layout Standard
44815 Spell checking is explained in section
44816 \begin_inset space ~
44820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44822 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44829 \begin_layout Subsection
44833 \begin_layout Standard
44834 The thesaurus is described in section
44835 \begin_inset space ~
44839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44841 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44848 \begin_layout Subsection
44850 \begin_inset Index idx
44853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44860 \begin_inset Index idx
44863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44872 \begin_layout Standard
44873 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
44874 the highlighted document part.
44877 \begin_layout Subsection
44883 \begin_inset Index idx
44886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44887 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44896 \begin_layout Standard
44897 Generates with the help of the program
44899 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44902 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44903 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44904 This feature is not available on Windows.
44907 \begin_layout Subsection
44913 \begin_inset Index idx
44916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44926 \begin_layout Standard
44927 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44932 \begin_inset space ~
44937 to see the full filename paths.
44940 \begin_layout Subsection
44942 \begin_inset Index idx
44945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44954 \begin_layout Standard
44955 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44956 files as described in section
44957 \begin_inset space ~
44961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44963 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44970 \begin_layout Subsection
44972 \begin_inset Index idx
44975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44988 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45006 \begin_inset Index idx
45009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
45019 \begin_layout Standard
45020 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
45021 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
45022 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45023 -packages and programs it needs; see
45025 \begin_inset space ~
45029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45031 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
45038 \begin_layout Subsection
45042 \begin_layout Standard
45047 dialog as described in detail in appendix
45048 \begin_inset space ~
45052 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45054 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45061 \begin_layout Section
45063 \begin_inset Index idx
45066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45075 \begin_layout Standard
45076 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
45077 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
45079 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
45083 \begin_layout Standard
45087 \begin_inset space ~
45092 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
45093 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45094 packages and classes found
45095 by \SpecialChar LyX
45097 \begin_inset space ~
45101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45103 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
45110 \begin_layout Standard
45114 \begin_inset space ~
45119 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
45124 \begin_layout Section
45126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45128 name "sec:Toolbars"
45135 \begin_layout Standard
45136 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
45137 \begin_inset space ~
45141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45143 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
45150 \begin_layout Standard
45151 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
45152 This is described in the
45154 Additional Features
45159 \begin_layout Subsection
45161 \begin_inset Index idx
45164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45173 \begin_layout Standard
45174 \begin_inset Graphics
45175 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
45183 \begin_layout Standard
45184 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45190 \begin_layout Standard
45191 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
45196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45208 \begin_inset Note Note
45211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45212 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
45217 manual for more information.
45225 \begin_layout Standard
45226 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45232 \begin_layout Standard
45233 \begin_inset Tabular
45234 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
45235 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45236 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45237 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45243 \begin_inset Graphics
45244 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
45254 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45258 pull-down box for the environments
45271 \begin_layout Standard
45272 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
45278 \begin_layout Standard
45280 \begin_inset Tabular
45281 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="24" columns="2">
45282 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45283 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45284 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45285 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45302 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45308 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45338 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45345 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45368 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45375 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45376 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45379 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45384 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45398 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45405 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45414 arg "spelling-continuously"
45422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45426 Spellcheck continuously
45432 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45455 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45492 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45522 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45545 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45552 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45575 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45577 \change_inserted -712698321 1545905310
45582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45591 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45614 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45616 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45620 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45624 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45654 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45656 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45664 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45673 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45674 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45682 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45690 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45696 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45697 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
45704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45725 Emphasize text, function of the
45726 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758222
45729 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45731 \begin_inset space ~
45734 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45736 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758222
45742 arg "dialog-show character"
45753 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45774 Set text to noun style, function of the
45775 \change_deleted -712698321 1525758226
45778 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45780 \begin_inset space ~
45783 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45785 \change_inserted -712698321 1525758226
45791 arg "dialog-show character"
45802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45808 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900859
45811 arg "dynamic-char-styles"
45819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45824 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900930
45827 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45840 \change_deleted -712698321 1545899987
45845 arg "textstyle-apply"
45855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45860 \change_deleted -712698321 1545900001
45861 Format text using the current settings in the
45863 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
45865 \begin_inset space ~
45868 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
45879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45903 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
45905 \begin_inset space ~
45914 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45923 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45944 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45951 arg "tabular-insert"
45959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45965 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
45972 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45978 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900837
45981 arg "dynamic-custom-insets"
45989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45994 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900953
45997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46004 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46013 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
46021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46025 Toggle outline window on/off,
46027 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46034 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46043 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
46051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46055 Toggle math toolbar on/off
46061 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46070 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
46078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46082 Toggle table toolbar on/off
46095 \begin_layout Subsection
46097 \begin_inset Index idx
46100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46109 \begin_layout Standard
46110 \begin_inset Graphics
46111 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
46119 \begin_layout Standard
46120 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46126 \begin_layout Standard
46127 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
46131 \begin_layout Standard
46132 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46138 \begin_layout Standard
46139 \begin_inset Tabular
46140 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="26" columns="2">
46141 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46142 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46143 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46180 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
46188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46198 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46207 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
46215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46225 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46234 arg "layout-toggle List"
46242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46252 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46261 arg "layout-toggle Description"
46269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46279 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46280 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46288 arg "depth-increment"
46296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46302 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46304 \begin_inset space ~
46308 \begin_inset space ~
46317 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46326 arg "depth-decrement"
46334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46340 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46342 \begin_inset space ~
46346 \begin_inset space ~
46355 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46364 arg "float-insert figure"
46372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46378 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46379 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46395 arg "float-insert table"
46403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46410 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
46417 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46447 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46448 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46456 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
46464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46470 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
46494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46530 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46532 \begin_inset space ~
46541 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46550 arg "nomencl-insert"
46558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46564 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46566 \begin_inset space ~
46575 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46584 arg "footnote-insert"
46592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46598 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46614 arg "marginalnote-insert"
46622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46630 \begin_inset space ~
46639 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46662 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46663 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
46665 \begin_inset space ~
46674 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46683 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46704 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46705 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46727 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46734 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46751 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46757 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46759 \begin_inset space ~
46768 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46777 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46785 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46791 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46792 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
46799 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46808 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46822 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
46823 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46825 \begin_inset space ~
46834 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46843 arg "dialog-show character"
46851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46857 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46859 \begin_inset space ~
46862 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
46869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46875 \change_inserted -712698321 1545899981
46880 arg "textstyle-apply"
46888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46893 \change_inserted -712698321 1545900045
46894 Format text using the recent settings in the
46897 arg "dialog-show character"
46906 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46915 arg "layout-paragraph"
46923 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46929 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
46931 \begin_inset space ~
46940 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46949 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46963 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
46977 \begin_layout Subsection
46978 View/Update Toolbar
46979 \begin_inset Index idx
46982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46983 Toolbar ! View / Update
46991 \begin_layout Standard
46992 \begin_inset Graphics
46993 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
47000 \begin_layout Standard
47001 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47007 \begin_layout Standard
47008 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
47012 \begin_layout Standard
47013 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
47019 \begin_layout Standard
47020 \begin_inset Tabular
47021 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
47022 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
47023 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47024 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
47025 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47048 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47055 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47064 arg "buffer-update"
47072 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47078 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47085 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47094 arg "master-buffer-view"
47102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47108 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47110 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333746
47112 \begin_inset space ~
47118 \begin_inset space ~
47127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47136 arg "master-buffer-update"
47144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47152 \begin_inset space ~
47156 \begin_inset space ~
47165 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47174 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
47182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47188 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47189 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47191 \change_deleted -131811572 1600333766
47193 \change_inserted -131811572 1600333762
47196 \SpecialChar menuseparator
47197 Synchronize with Output
47203 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47214 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901299
47224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47230 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47231 View (Other Formats)
47237 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
47238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47244 arg "update-others"
47248 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901301
47256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
47259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47262 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47263 Update (Other Formats)
47276 \begin_layout Standard
47278 \change_deleted -712698321 1545901302
47279 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
47285 \begin_layout Subsection
47289 \begin_layout Standard
47290 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
47291 \begin_inset space ~
47295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47297 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47301 , the table toolbar
47302 \begin_inset Index idx
47305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47314 \begin_inset space ~
47319 manual and the math macro toolbar
47320 \begin_inset Index idx
47323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47336 \begin_layout Chapter
47337 The Document Settings
47338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47340 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47345 \begin_inset Index idx
47348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47349 Document ! Settings
47357 \begin_layout Standard
47361 \begin_inset space ~
47366 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
47367 is called with the menu
47369 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47373 You can save your document settings as default with the
47375 Save as Document Defaults
47377 button in any dialog.
47378 This will create a template named
47382 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
47383 when you create a new document without
47387 \begin_layout Standard
47392 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
47393 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
47396 \begin_layout Standard
47397 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
47398 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
47399 to find the one you are looking for.
47400 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
47401 the submenus of the dialog.
47403 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47407 \begin_inset space \space{}
47411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47415 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47418 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
47419 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
47420 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
47423 \begin_layout Section
47427 \begin_layout Standard
47428 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
47430 Document classes are described in section
47431 \begin_inset space ~
47435 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47437 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
47444 \begin_layout Standard
47448 \begin_inset space ~
47453 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
47458 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
47459 as a layout for a document class.
47460 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
47462 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
47471 \begin_layout Standard
47472 Some classes use special class options by default.
47473 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
47477 and you can decide to use them or not.
47478 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
47479 recommended you leave them untouched.
47484 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47485 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
47490 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47492 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
47497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47498 When you want to use one of the following drivers
47499 \begin_inset Newline newline
47504 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
47507 \begin_inset Newline newline
47510 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47511 distribution, see section
47516 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47518 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
47531 \begin_layout Standard
47536 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
47537 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
47538 in the background if the child document
47539 is opened without its master.
47540 This way child documents are always compilable.
47541 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
47548 \begin_inset space ~
47556 \begin_layout Standard
47557 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47568 \begin_inset Index idx
47571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47573 packages ! prettyref
47579 \begin_inset Index idx
47582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47584 packages ! refstyle
47589 for cross-references, see section
47590 \begin_inset space ~
47594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47596 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47603 \begin_layout Section
47607 \begin_layout Standard
47608 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
47609 Please refer to the section
47612 \begin_inset space ~
47620 \begin_inset space ~
47625 manual for details.
47628 \begin_layout Section
47632 \begin_layout Standard
47633 Modules are explained in section
47634 \begin_inset space ~
47638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47640 reference "subsec:Modules"
47647 \begin_layout Section
47651 \begin_layout Standard
47653 \begin_inset space ~
47657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47659 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47666 \begin_layout Section
47670 \begin_layout Standard
47671 The document font settings are described in section
47672 \begin_inset space ~
47676 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47678 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47685 \begin_layout Section
47689 \begin_layout Standard
47690 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47702 \begin_inset space ~
47707 and whether it should be a
47710 \begin_inset space ~
47715 can also be specified here.
47718 \begin_layout Standard
47719 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47720 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47721 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
47723 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
47726 \begin_layout Standard
47729 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47732 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47733 justifies the text on screen.
47734 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47736 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288869
47740 \begin_layout Standard
47742 \change_inserted -712698321 1554288904
47751 lets you select which style newly inserted tables should use by default.
47756 \begin_layout Section
47760 \begin_layout Standard
47761 This dialog is described in sections
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47768 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47773 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47775 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47782 \begin_layout Section
47786 \begin_layout Standard
47787 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47788 \begin_inset space ~
47792 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47794 reference "subsec:Margins"
47801 \begin_layout Section
47803 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47805 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47810 \begin_inset Index idx
47813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47814 Language ! Encoding
47822 \begin_layout Standard
47823 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47824 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47825 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47827 is always encoded in utf8).
47828 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
47829 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47830 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47831 -command is not known for
47832 a particular character).
47833 \change_inserted -712698321 1557594829
47837 \begin_layout Standard
47839 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596095
47840 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
47841 outputs \SpecialChar LaTeX
47842 files in Unicode – or utf8, for that matter (which
47843 is nowadays also \SpecialChar LaTeX
47844 's default encoding).
47845 This should normally fit your needs, since \SpecialChar LaTeX
47846 's Unicode support covers the
47847 characters of most scripts.
47848 Nonetheless it is not yet comprehensive, so there might be cases where
47849 using one of the traditional, or
47850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47857 , encodings is necessary.
47860 \begin_layout Standard
47862 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596136
47864 provides support for these traditional encodings.
47867 Traditional (auto-selected)
47873 dropdown, \SpecialChar LyX
47874 automatically selects the appropriate traditional encoding for
47875 the given language(s).
47877 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47881 \begin_layout Standard
47883 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595310
47884 If you use the option
47889 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47892 If the document contains text in more than one language you
47893 \change_inserted -712698321 1557595342
47896 may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47899 \change_deleted -712698321 1557595350
47900 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
47901 exactly one encoding.
47902 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47907 \begin_layout Standard
47909 \change_deleted 630872221 1621942852
47910 As a third option, \SpecialChar LyX
47916 If this is chosen, any character outside the 7bit ASCII range will be output
47917 as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47919 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596155
47923 \begin_layout Standard
47925 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645585
47926 Finally, you can also select
47930 , which lets you specify a specific (single) encoding for the whole document.
47931 Note that this encoding is then used for
47936 The custom list (which is spelled out below) consists of traditional encodings
47937 and some special cases of Unicode for specific purposes (see explanation
47941 \begin_layout Standard
47943 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47945 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943769
47949 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943773
47950 Do not load inputenc
47951 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47955 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943234
47957 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943236
47959 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47961 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943278
47962 in the next dropdown menu
47963 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47964 does what it states:
47965 \change_inserted 630872221 1621943783
47967 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943782
47969 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645268
47970 t prevents \SpecialChar LyX
47971 from automatically loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47977 \begin_inset Index idx
47980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47982 \change_inserted -712698321 1557645185
47984 packages ! inputenc
47992 This option might be useful if you use a class or package that pre-loads
47993 inputenc or if inputenc must not be used for some reason.
47994 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
47995 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
47996 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47998 Note that this option is only available for the standard
48004 Traditional (auto-selected)
48011 \begin_layout Standard
48013 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596063
48015 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
48016 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
48017 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
48018 installation supports Unicode), choose
48019 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
48020 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48021 is quite incomplete, so
48022 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
48027 (when \SpecialChar LyX
48028 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48029 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
48030 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
48031 -commands is not used, because all
48032 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
48033 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48034 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48035 , two new alternative engines
48036 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
48038 Both engines support Unicode natively.
48040 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48059 \begin_inset space ~
48065 \begin_inset space ~
48069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48071 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
48076 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
48080 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
48085 \begin_layout Standard
48089 \begin_inset space ~
48094 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48095 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
48097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48105 The possible settings are:
48108 \begin_layout Description
48109 Default uses the language package that is selected in
48111 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
48112 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
48116 \begin_inset space ~
48120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48122 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
48129 \begin_layout Description
48130 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
48131 format you will use.
48132 In many cases this will be
48137 \begin_inset Index idx
48140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48148 If the newer package
48153 \begin_inset Index idx
48156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48158 packages ! polyglossia
48163 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48164 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48165 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
48167 this package will be used instead of
48174 \begin_layout Description
48176 \begin_inset space ~
48187 would be more appropriate.
48190 \begin_layout Description
48191 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
48192 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
48196 (for German texts), type in
48199 \begin_inset Newline newline
48204 usepackage{ngerman}
48207 \begin_layout Description
48208 None will not use a language package.
48209 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
48212 \begin_layout Standard
48213 Here is a list with the important encodings:
48216 \begin_layout Description
48218 \change_deleted -712698321 1557645284
48220 \begin_inset space ~
48224 \begin_inset space ~
48228 \begin_inset space ~
48235 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48241 \begin_inset Index idx
48244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48246 packages ! inputenc
48252 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
48253 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
48254 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
48260 \begin_layout Description
48261 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
48263 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
48264 commands, which may result in a big
48265 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
48266 -commands are needed.
48268 \change_deleted 630872221 1621943931
48269 This is the same as the
48282 \begin_layout Description
48284 \begin_inset space ~
48288 \begin_inset space ~
48291 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
48294 \begin_layout Description
48296 \begin_inset space ~
48300 \begin_inset space ~
48303 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
48306 \begin_layout Description
48308 \begin_inset space ~
48311 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
48314 \begin_layout Description
48316 \begin_inset space ~
48320 \begin_inset space ~
48323 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
48324 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
48327 \begin_layout Description
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48333 \begin_inset space ~
48336 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
48340 \begin_layout Description
48342 \begin_inset space ~
48346 \begin_inset space ~
48349 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
48350 ISO-8859-13 encoding
48353 \begin_layout Description
48355 \begin_inset space ~
48359 \begin_inset space ~
48363 \begin_inset space ~
48366 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
48367 \begin_inset space ~
48373 \begin_layout Description
48375 \begin_inset space ~
48379 \begin_inset space ~
48383 \begin_inset space ~
48386 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
48387 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
48390 \begin_layout Description
48392 \begin_inset space ~
48396 \begin_inset space ~
48399 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
48400 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
48401 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48402 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48403 \begin_inset space ~
48407 \begin_inset space ~
48413 \begin_layout Description
48415 \begin_inset space ~
48419 \begin_inset space ~
48422 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
48423 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
48424 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48426 should try to use the encoding Unicode
48427 \begin_inset space ~
48431 \begin_inset space ~
48437 \begin_layout Description
48439 \begin_inset space ~
48443 \begin_inset space ~
48446 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
48449 \begin_layout Description
48451 \begin_inset space ~
48455 \begin_inset space ~
48458 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
48461 \begin_layout Description
48463 \begin_inset space ~
48467 \begin_inset space ~
48470 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
48473 \begin_layout Description
48475 \begin_inset space ~
48478 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
48481 \begin_layout Description
48483 \begin_inset space ~
48486 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
48489 \begin_layout Description
48491 \begin_inset space ~
48495 \begin_inset space ~
48498 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
48501 \begin_layout Description
48503 \begin_inset space ~
48507 \begin_inset space ~
48513 \begin_layout Description
48515 \begin_inset space ~
48519 \begin_inset space ~
48522 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
48525 \begin_layout Description
48527 \begin_inset space ~
48531 \begin_inset space ~
48537 \begin_layout Description
48539 \begin_inset space ~
48543 \begin_inset space ~
48546 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48552 \begin_inset Index idx
48555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48562 , when using this, set the document language to
48567 \begin_layout Description
48569 \begin_inset space ~
48573 \begin_inset space ~
48576 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48581 , when using this, set the document language to
48584 \begin_inset space ~
48590 \begin_layout Description
48592 \begin_inset space ~
48596 \begin_inset space ~
48599 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48605 \begin_inset Index idx
48608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48610 packages ! japanese
48615 , when using this, set the document language to
48620 \begin_layout Description
48622 \begin_inset space ~
48626 \begin_inset space ~
48629 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48634 , when using this, set the document language to
48639 \begin_layout Description
48641 \begin_inset space ~
48645 \begin_inset space ~
48648 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48653 , when using this, set the document language to
48658 \begin_layout Description
48660 \begin_inset space ~
48663 (EUC-KR) for Korean
48666 \begin_layout Description
48668 \begin_inset space ~
48672 \begin_inset space ~
48676 \begin_inset space ~
48679 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
48682 \begin_layout Description
48684 \begin_inset space ~
48688 \begin_inset space ~
48692 \begin_inset space ~
48695 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
48696 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
48697 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
48700 \begin_layout Description
48702 \begin_inset space ~
48706 \begin_inset space ~
48712 \begin_layout Description
48714 \begin_inset space ~
48718 \begin_inset space ~
48721 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
48722 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
48725 \begin_layout Description
48727 \begin_inset space ~
48731 \begin_inset space ~
48734 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48740 \begin_inset Index idx
48743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48750 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
48751 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596410
48753 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48754 with the default encoding (
48756 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48762 dropdown list) with CJK languages.
48763 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48768 \begin_layout Description
48770 \begin_inset space ~
48778 \begin_inset space ~
48781 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48788 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48791 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48798 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48799 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48801 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48804 \begin_layout Description
48806 \begin_inset space ~
48810 \begin_inset space ~
48813 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48819 \begin_inset Index idx
48822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48830 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596443
48833 including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48835 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596475
48836 This used to be more comprehensive than
48839 \begin_inset space ~
48844 , but meanwhile it is rather outdated.
48849 \begin_layout Description
48851 \begin_inset space ~
48854 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48860 \begin_inset Index idx
48863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48865 packages ! inputenc
48872 \change_deleted -712698321 1557596266
48873 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
48875 \change_inserted -712698321 1557596400
48876 This encoding is selected by \SpecialChar LyX
48877 with the default encoding (
48879 Unicode (utf8) [default]
48885 dropdown list) with non-CJK languages.
48886 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48891 \begin_layout Description
48893 \begin_inset space ~
48897 \begin_inset space ~
48901 \begin_inset space ~
48904 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48905 \begin_inset space ~
48911 \begin_layout Description
48913 \begin_inset space ~
48917 \begin_inset space ~
48921 \begin_inset space ~
48924 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
48925 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
48926 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
48930 \begin_layout Description
48932 \begin_inset space ~
48936 \begin_inset space ~
48940 \begin_inset space ~
48943 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
48944 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48947 \begin_layout Section
48949 \begin_inset Index idx
48952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48959 \begin_inset Index idx
48962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48969 \begin_inset Index idx
48972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48973 Color ! Shaded boxes
48979 \begin_inset Index idx
48982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48983 Color ! Greyed-out notes
48991 \begin_layout Standard
48992 Here you can alter the font color for the
48996 (default: black), for
48999 \begin_inset space ~
49004 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
49008 (default: white) and for
49011 \begin_inset space ~
49021 sets the color back to the default.
49024 \begin_layout Standard
49025 Clicking any button showing
49033 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
49034 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
49035 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
49036 later more quickly.
49039 \begin_layout Standard
49040 Note, if you change the
49043 \begin_inset space ~
49048 font color and use the option
49051 \begin_inset space ~
49056 in the document settings under
49059 \begin_inset space ~
49064 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
49065 \begin_inset space ~
49069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49071 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49078 \begin_layout Standard
49079 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
49085 \begin_layout Standard
49089 \begin_inset space ~
49098 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
49101 \begin_inset space ~
49104 Code after a forced page break:
49107 \begin_layout Itemize
49108 For the page color:
49109 \begin_inset Newline newline
49116 pagecolor{color name}
49119 \begin_layout Itemize
49120 For the text color:
49121 \begin_inset Newline newline
49131 \begin_layout Standard
49132 You are restricted to one of
49168 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
49175 \begin_inset space ~
49181 \begin_inset Newline newline
49184 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
49185 names to refer to them:
49188 \begin_layout Itemize
49194 \begin_inset Newline newline
49199 page_backgroundcolor
49202 \begin_layout Itemize
49206 \begin_inset space ~
49212 \begin_inset Newline newline
49220 \begin_layout Itemize
49224 \begin_inset space ~
49230 \begin_inset Newline newline
49238 \begin_layout Itemize
49242 \begin_inset space ~
49248 \begin_inset Newline newline
49256 \begin_layout Standard
49257 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
49260 \begin_inset space ~
49268 \begin_inset space ~
49276 \begin_layout Section
49278 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206827
49282 \begin_layout Standard
49284 \change_inserted -712698321 1577206929
49285 Here you can do some settings related to change tracking (see sec.
49286 \begin_inset space ~
49290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49292 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
49300 Alternatively to the menu or toolbar, you can set here whether changes
49301 are being tracked and whether they are shown in the output.
49304 \begin_layout Standard
49306 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49307 Additionally, you can advise
49308 \change_inserted 630872221 1622044204
49311 \change_deleted 630872221 1622044196
49313 \change_inserted -712698321 1577207214
49314 to place a change bar in the margin of the output.
49315 This might be useful to make changed passages more salient.
49318 \begin_layout Section
49322 \begin_layout Standard
49323 Here you can adjust the
49327 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
49331 as described in section
49332 \begin_inset space ~
49336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49338 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
49343 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620045
49347 \begin_layout Standard
49349 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620379
49350 You can typeset lines numbering in the output file by enabling the checkbox
49352 The functionality is handled by package lineno and additional options of
49353 this package can be used as well.
49354 The most common one are:
49357 \begin_layout Description
49359 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620630
49360 right Line numbers to the right margin
49363 \begin_layout Description
49365 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620589
49366 switch Line number to the outer margin (left – even pages, right – odd pages)
49370 \begin_layout Description
49372 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620637
49373 switch* Line numbers to the inner margin
49376 \begin_layout Description
49378 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989692
49379 modulo Print numbers only on multiples of five lines
49382 \begin_layout Description
49384 \change_inserted 5863208 1601989752
49385 pagewise Restart numbering for each page
49388 \begin_layout Description
49390 \change_inserted 5863208 1558620792
49392 \begin_inset space ~
49395 mathlines Line numbers for math environments (both options needed).
49400 \begin_layout Section
49404 \begin_layout Standard
49405 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49411 \begin_inset Index idx
49414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49416 packages ! biblatex
49426 \begin_inset Index idx
49429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49441 \begin_inset Index idx
49444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49452 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49455 Sectioned bibliography
49457 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49463 \begin_inset Index idx
49466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49468 packages ! bibtopic
49478 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
49479 Finally, you can select a document-specific
49483 for the generation of the bibliography.
49484 For a further description of these possibilities see section
49485 \begin_inset space ~
49489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49491 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49498 \begin_layout Section
49502 \begin_layout Standard
49503 Here you can define the
49507 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
49509 \begin_inset space ~
49513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49515 reference "sec:Index"
49522 \begin_layout Section
49526 \begin_layout Standard
49527 The PDF properties are explained in section
49528 \begin_inset space ~
49532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49534 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49541 \begin_layout Section
49545 \begin_layout Standard
49546 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
49547 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49553 \begin_inset Index idx
49556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49568 \begin_inset Index idx
49571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49583 \begin_inset Index idx
49586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49598 \begin_inset Index idx
49601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49613 \begin_inset Index idx
49616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49618 packages ! mathdots
49628 \begin_inset Index idx
49631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49633 packages ! mathtools
49643 \begin_inset Index idx
49646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49658 \begin_inset Index idx
49661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49663 packages ! stackrel
49673 \begin_inset Index idx
49676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49678 packages ! stmaryrd
49688 \begin_inset Index idx
49691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49693 packages ! undertilde
49698 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
49701 \begin_layout Description
49702 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49703 -errors in formulas,
49704 ensure that you have this enabled.
49707 \begin_layout Description
49708 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
49709 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49710 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
49714 \begin_layout Description
49715 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
49718 \begin_inset space ~
49730 \begin_layout Description
49731 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
49734 \begin_inset space ~
49746 \begin_layout Description
49747 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
49758 \begin_layout Description
49759 mathtools is used for the math commands
49795 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
49802 \begin_layout Description
49803 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
49805 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49814 \begin_layout Description
49815 stackrel is used for the math command
49832 \begin_layout Description
49833 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49836 \begin_layout Description
49837 undertilde is used for the math command
49845 Accents for one Character
49854 \begin_layout Section
49856 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030304
49858 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030306
49864 \begin_layout Standard
49866 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030352
49867 Here you can set global float placement and alignment options.
49870 \begin_layout Standard
49872 \change_deleted -712698321 1526030366
49873 The float placement options
49874 \change_inserted -712698321 1526030367
49877 are described in the section
49880 \begin_inset space ~
49884 \change_deleted -712698321 1526031799
49886 \change_inserted -712698321 1526031800
49894 \begin_inset space ~
49902 \begin_layout Section
49906 \begin_layout Standard
49907 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49909 Program Code Listings
49914 \begin_inset space ~
49922 \begin_layout Section
49926 \begin_layout Standard
49927 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49935 set to be used and set the
49940 The itemize environment is described in section
49941 \begin_inset space ~
49945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49947 reference "sec:Itemize"
49954 \begin_layout Standard
49955 You can furthermore specify a
49958 \begin_inset space ~
49963 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49964 command of the desired character.
49965 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
49972 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49978 \begin_inset space \space{}
49982 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49992 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
49993 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49996 \begin_layout Standard
49997 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50005 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50006 -packages in the preamble (menu
50009 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50010 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50013 \begin_inset space ~
50019 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
50023 usepackage{textcomp}
50026 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
50030 usepackage{amssymb}
50040 \begin_layout Section
50044 \begin_layout Standard
50045 Branches are described in section
50046 \begin_inset space ~
50050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50052 reference "sec:Branches"
50059 \begin_layout Section
50061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50063 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
50070 \begin_layout Standard
50071 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
50074 \begin_layout Description
50076 \begin_inset space ~
50080 \begin_inset space ~
50083 Format: The format that is used when you enter
50084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50100 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50103 View Master Document
50104 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50111 Update Master Document
50112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50119 menu or the toolbar.
50120 The default is set in
50122 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50123 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
50125 \begin_inset space ~
50128 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
50132 \begin_inset space ~
50136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50138 reference "sec:File-Formats"
50145 \begin_layout Description
50147 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647276
50149 \begin_inset space ~
50153 \begin_inset space ~
50157 \begin_inset space ~
50160 programs If this is switched on, \SpecialChar LaTeX
50165 option which is needed with some packages.
50166 Note that this comes with security risks, so please use this only when
50167 really necessary and if you know what you are doing.
50170 \begin_layout Description
50172 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647006
50174 \begin_inset space ~
50178 \begin_inset space ~
50181 Options offers settings for the
50189 \begin_layout Itemize
50193 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646679
50195 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646679
50197 \begin_inset space ~
50203 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646686
50205 \begin_inset space ~
50209 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646686
50215 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646719
50217 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646729
50218 settings for the menu
50220 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50224 \begin_inset space ~
50228 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646752
50231 and allows to customize the macro used in this process
50232 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646757
50237 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50239 \change_deleted -712698321 1578646759
50241 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646759
50244 or a detailed description see section
50246 Reverse DVI/PDF search
50251 \begin_inset space ~
50257 \change_inserted -712698321 1578646762
50261 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647009
50265 \begin_layout Itemize
50267 \change_inserted -712698321 1578647929
50270 Put fragile content out of moving arguments
50272 determines whether so-called
50273 \begin_inset Quotes els
50277 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50281 constructs (such as labels or index entries) are placed outside of so-called
50283 \begin_inset Quotes els
50287 \begin_inset Quotes ers
50290 in \SpecialChar LaTeX
50291 (such as sections or captions), even if the corresponding insets are
50292 placed in such context in \SpecialChar LyX
50294 This setting is on by default, since it prevents nasty \SpecialChar LaTeX
50296 If you rely on labels or index entries being kept inside the problematic
50297 macros, you can uncheck this.
50298 If you don't know what we are talking about here, worry not: just leave
50305 \begin_layout Description
50307 \begin_inset space ~
50311 \begin_inset space ~
50314 Options offers settings for the export format
50322 \begin_inset space ~
50327 will assure that the output follows exactly version
50328 \begin_inset space ~
50331 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
50335 \begin_inset space ~
50340 settings are described in detail in section
50342 Math Output in XHTML
50347 \begin_inset space ~
50356 \begin_inset space ~
50360 \begin_inset space ~
50365 is used for the size of equations in the output.
50368 \begin_layout Description
50370 \begin_inset space ~
50375 Save transient properties
50377 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
50378 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
50379 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
50383 \begin_layout Itemize
50384 the activation of change tracking
50387 \begin_layout Itemize
50388 the output of tracked changes
50391 \begin_layout Itemize
50392 the recording of the document directory path.
50395 \begin_layout Standard
50396 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
50397 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
50401 \begin_layout Section
50409 \begin_layout Standard
50410 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50412 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
50414 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50416 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
50420 \begin_layout Standard
50421 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50422 -syntax is given in section
50423 \begin_inset space ~
50427 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50429 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
50436 \begin_layout Chapter
50442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50444 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50449 \begin_inset Index idx
50452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50461 \begin_layout Standard
50462 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
50464 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50468 It has the following submenus.
50471 \begin_layout Section
50475 \begin_layout Subsection
50479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50480 User Interface File
50481 \begin_inset Index idx
50484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50485 Customization ! of toolbars
50491 \begin_inset Index idx
50494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50495 Customization ! of menus
50503 \begin_layout Standard
50504 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
50505 interface (ui) file.
50506 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
50514 \begin_layout Description
50519 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
50522 \begin_layout Description
50529 the menu entries in popup context menus
50532 \begin_layout Description
50537 specifies the toolbar buttons
50540 \begin_layout Standard
50541 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
50542 and edit the entries.
50545 \begin_layout Standard
50546 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
50558 entries must be finished with an explicit
50583 and in the case of the
50584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50596 The syntax for the entries is:
50599 \begin_layout Standard
50600 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50606 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50618 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50629 \begin_layout Standard
50631 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50634 All the \SpecialChar LyX
50635 -functions are listed in the menu
50637 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
50639 \begin_inset space ~
50647 \begin_layout Standard
50648 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50654 \begin_layout Standard
50655 For example, assuming you use the menu
50657 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50660 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
50664 \begin_layout Standard
50665 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50671 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50683 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50689 \begin_layout Standard
50691 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50706 to have the sixth bookmark.
50709 \begin_layout Standard
50713 \begin_inset space ~
50718 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
50719 's toolbar buttons.
50720 The currently available icon sets are compared in
50721 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50724 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
50732 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50736 \begin_layout Standard
50739 Enable tool tips in main work area
50741 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
50745 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50749 \begin_layout Standard
50754 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
50755 should display in the menu
50757 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50759 \begin_inset space ~
50767 \begin_layout Subsection
50771 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50775 \begin_layout Standard
50778 Restore window layouts and geometries
50781 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
50782 the last \SpecialChar LyX
50786 \begin_layout Standard
50789 Restore cursor positions
50791 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
50795 \begin_layout Standard
50798 Load opened files from last session
50800 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50804 \begin_layout Standard
50807 Clear all session information
50809 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
50810 sessions (cursor positions, names
50811 of last opened documents, etc.).
50814 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50816 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50818 name "subsec:Backup documents"
50823 \begin_inset Index idx
50826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50835 \begin_layout Standard
50838 Backup original documents when saving
50840 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
50841 it was saved the last time.
50842 It is stored in the
50845 \begin_inset space ~
50851 \begin_inset space ~
50855 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50857 reference "sec:Paths"
50861 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
50864 \begin_inset space ~
50870 The backup file has the file extension
50871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50879 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50885 \begin_layout Standard
50888 Backup documents, every
50890 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
50893 \begin_layout Standard
50896 Save documents compressed by default
50898 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50899 \begin_inset space ~
50903 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50905 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50910 This applies to newly created documents only.
50911 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50914 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50915 Windows & work area
50918 \begin_layout Standard
50921 Open documents in tabs
50923 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50927 \begin_layout Standard
50932 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50939 \begin_inset space ~
50943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50945 reference "sec:Paths"
50949 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50956 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
50957 documents will be opened in the same running instance
50958 of \SpecialChar LyX
50960 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50961 instance is created for each file.
50964 \begin_layout Standard
50967 Single close-tab button
50969 is checked, there will only be one close button (
50979 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50980 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50981 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
50985 \begin_layout Standard
50986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50994 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50995 before the change takes effect.
51003 \begin_layout Standard
51008 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
51010 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
51012 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
51016 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
51017 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
51018 and only want to close the view in once instance.
51021 \begin_layout Subsection
51023 \begin_inset Index idx
51026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51033 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51035 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
51042 \begin_layout Standard
51043 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
51047 \begin_layout Standard
51048 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51056 This section only deals with the fonts
51060 the \SpecialChar LyX
51062 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
51065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
51066 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
51077 \begin_layout Standard
51078 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
51095 (depends on the system) as its
51098 \begin_inset space ~
51114 \begin_layout Standard
51115 You can change the font size with the
51122 \begin_layout Standard
51127 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
51129 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51132 points have the size of 1
51133 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51137 \begin_inset space ~
51141 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51143 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
51148 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
51149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51153 The sizes are explained in detail in section
51154 \begin_inset space ~
51158 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51160 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
51167 \begin_layout Subsection
51169 \begin_inset Index idx
51172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51173 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
51180 \begin_inset Index idx
51183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51192 \begin_layout Standard
51193 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
51194 by choosing an item in the
51195 list and selecting the
51202 \begin_layout Standard
51203 By checking the option
51207 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
51210 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
51211 \begin_inset space ~
51215 \begin_inset space ~
51220 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
51223 \begin_layout Subsection
51225 \begin_inset Index idx
51228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51237 \begin_layout Standard
51238 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
51242 \begin_layout Standard
51247 enables previewing snippets of your document.
51248 This feature is described in section
51249 \begin_inset space ~
51253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51255 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51262 \begin_layout Standard
51263 Checking the option
51266 \begin_inset space ~
51270 \begin_inset space ~
51274 \begin_inset space ~
51279 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
51282 \begin_layout Section
51284 \begin_inset Index idx
51287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51296 \begin_layout Subsection
51300 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51304 \begin_layout Standard
51307 Cursor follows scrollbar
51309 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
51313 \begin_layout Standard
51314 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
51315 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
51316 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
51319 \begin_layout Standard
51322 Scroll below end of document
51324 is self-explanatory.
51327 \begin_layout Standard
51328 In \SpecialChar LyX
51329 one can jump from word to word by pressing
51336 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
51338 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
51339 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
51340 \change_inserted -712698321 1578924606
51344 \begin_layout Standard
51346 \change_inserted -712698321 1607270592
51349 Keep change tracking markup on copy and paste
51351 is only relevant in documents that
51356 In such documents, change-tracked text will be copied and pasted as is
51365 markup) with this option selected.
51366 It the option is not selected, pasted text will be inserted without any
51368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51372 \begin_inset Quotes els
51376 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51380 This also applies to wrapping to\SpecialChar breakableslash
51381 dissolving from insets.
51386 track changes, pasted text is
51391 \begin_inset Quotes els
51395 \begin_inset Quotes ers
51398 notwithstanding the state of this option.
51403 \begin_layout Standard
51406 Sort environments alphabetically
51408 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51411 \begin_layout Standard
51414 Group environments by their category
51416 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51419 \begin_layout Standard
51424 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
51433 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509726
51437 \begin_layout Standard
51439 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51442 Search drive for cited files
51444 allows \SpecialChar LyX
51445 to query your disk for cited documents when using the
51448 \begin_inset space ~
51452 \begin_inset space ~
51456 \begin_inset space ~
51460 \begin_inset space ~
51463 Content\SpecialChar ldots
51466 context menu on a citation.
51470 \change_deleted 630872221 1622118829
51472 \change_inserted -712698321 1598509987
51475 field determines the search pattern.
51477 \begin_inset space ~
51481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51483 reference "subsec:Opening-cited-documents"
51492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51496 \begin_layout Standard
51497 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
51502 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
51503 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
51507 \begin_layout Subsection
51509 \begin_inset Index idx
51512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51519 \begin_inset Index idx
51522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51523 Settings ! Shortcuts
51531 \begin_layout Standard
51536 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
51538 Several binding files are available, among them:
51541 \begin_layout Description
51542 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
51545 \begin_layout Description
51546 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
51558 \begin_layout Description
51559 mac.bind a set of bindings for
51562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51570 \begin_layout Standard
51571 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
51576 , and binding files for special languages.
51577 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
51578 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51582 \begin_inset space \space{}
51586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51594 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
51595 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
51596 will try to use the appropriate binding
51600 \begin_layout Standard
51601 Some binding files, like
51605 , only have a limited scope.
51606 When looking at the end of the file
51610 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
51613 \begin_layout Standard
51617 \begin_inset space ~
51621 \begin_inset space ~
51626 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
51627 in the selected key binding file.
51630 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51632 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51634 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
51639 \begin_inset Index idx
51642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51643 Key Bindings ! Editing
51651 \begin_layout Standard
51652 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
51653 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
51654 functions and the bound shortcuts.
51655 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
51658 Show key-bindings containing
51661 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
51662 Insert there for example as keyword
51663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51670 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
51671 functions that contain
51672 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51680 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
51681 All \SpecialChar LyX
51682 functions are also listed in the file
51687 that you will find in the
51694 \begin_layout Standard
51695 For example, to add the shortcut
51703 , select the function and press the
51708 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
51709 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
51712 \begin_layout Standard
51713 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
51714 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
51719 \change_deleted -131811572 1600337868
51721 \change_inserted -131811572 1600337869
51726 ” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated
51729 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
51733 \begin_layout Standard
51734 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
51737 \begin_layout Standard
51738 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
51740 The syntax of the entries is:
51743 \begin_layout Standard
51749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51757 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51768 \begin_layout Standard
51769 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
51770 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
51771 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51798 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
51799 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
51800 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
51801 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
51803 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
51807 , you needed to specify it as
51812 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
51815 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
51818 \begin_layout Subsection
51820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51822 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
51827 \begin_inset Index idx
51830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51837 \begin_inset Index idx
51840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51841 Settings ! Keyboard Map
51849 \begin_layout Standard
51850 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
51851 For the case where this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
51852 provides keyboard maps.
51853 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
51854 is a Romanian one, you can enable
51857 \begin_inset space ~
51861 \begin_inset space ~
51866 and select the keyboard map file named
51873 \begin_layout Standard
51882 keyboard map and, if you use the
51886 bindings, you can select the first and second with
51889 arg "keymap-primary"
51895 arg "keymap-secondary"
51898 respectively or toggle between them with
51901 arg "keymap-toggle"
51907 \begin_layout Standard
51908 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51916 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
51925 \begin_layout Standard
51926 You can also specify the mouse
51928 Wheel scrolling speed
51931 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
51935 Middle mouse button pasting
51937 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
51938 inserts the content of the clipboard.
51941 \begin_layout Standard
51949 \begin_inset space ~
51953 \begin_inset space ~
51958 you can select a key for zooming.
51959 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
51962 \begin_layout Subsection
51966 \begin_layout Standard
51967 Input completion is described in section
51968 \begin_inset space ~
51972 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51974 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51981 \begin_layout Section
51983 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51990 \begin_inset Index idx
51993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52000 \begin_inset Index idx
52003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52012 \begin_layout Standard
52013 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
52014 are normally determined during
52016 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
52019 \begin_layout Description
52021 \begin_inset space ~
52024 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
52025 's working directory.
52026 It is the default when you
52037 \begin_inset space ~
52045 \begin_layout Description
52047 \begin_inset space ~
52050 templates This directory
52051 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354019
52052 contains the templates that are shown
52053 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354025
52054 will be opened when you use the menu
52055 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354026
52060 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52062 \begin_inset space ~
52066 \begin_inset space ~
52074 \begin_layout Description
52076 \begin_inset space ~
52079 files This directory
52080 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354035
52081 will be opened when you use the
52082 \change_inserted -712698321 1553354048
52083 contains the example files that are listed in
52086 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352959
52095 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52097 \change_inserted -712698321 1553352950
52099 \change_deleted -712698321 1553352963
52105 \change_deleted -712698321 1553354004
52107 \begin_inset Newline newline
52111 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
52114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52123 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
52124 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
52134 \begin_layout Description
52136 \begin_inset space ~
52140 \begin_inset Index idx
52143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52149 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
52150 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
52151 \begin_inset space ~
52155 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52157 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52165 will be used to save the backups.
52166 \begin_inset Newline newline
52169 Backup files have the ending
52170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52180 \begin_layout Description
52182 \begin_inset space ~
52185 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
52186 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
52188 \begin_inset Newline newline
52195 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
52201 You can edit this file with the program
52210 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
52211 in its preferences under
52214 \begin_inset space ~
52220 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
52225 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
52227 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
52228 in your \SpecialChar LyX
52234 and \SpecialChar LyX
52235 need to be running the same time.
52236 \begin_inset Newline newline
52239 The pipe is also used for the
52243 feature, see section
52244 \begin_inset space ~
52248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52250 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52255 \begin_inset Newline newline
52258 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
52259 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
52260 \begin_inset Newline newline
52276 \begin_layout Description
52278 \begin_inset space ~
52281 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
52284 \begin_layout Description
52286 \begin_inset space ~
52289 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
52290 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
52291 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52294 \begin_layout Description
52296 \begin_inset space ~
52299 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
52305 You only need to specify it if you are using
52309 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
52311 For \SpecialChar LyX
52316 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
52320 \begin_layout Description
52322 \begin_inset space ~
52325 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
52326 When \SpecialChar LyX
52327 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
52328 to find it on the system.
52329 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
52331 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
52333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52340 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
52341 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
52344 \begin_layout Description
52346 \begin_inset space ~
52349 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
52350 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
52351 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
52352 code or in the document
52354 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
52356 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
52357 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
52358 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
52359 scanned for the input files.
52360 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
52361 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
52363 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
52364 compilation may fail for some documents.
52367 \begin_layout Section
52371 \begin_layout Standard
52372 Here you can insert your
52381 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
52383 \begin_inset space ~
52387 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52389 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52393 , to mark changes you make as yours.
52396 \begin_layout Section
52398 \begin_inset Index idx
52401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52402 Language ! Settings
52408 \begin_inset Index idx
52411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52412 Settings ! Language
52420 \begin_layout Subsection
52422 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52424 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52431 \begin_layout Description
52433 \begin_inset space ~
52437 \begin_inset space ~
52440 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
52442 You can find its actual translation status here:
52443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52445 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
52451 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708959
52455 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52457 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708986
52458 LaTeX Language Support
52463 \begin_layout Description
52465 \begin_inset space ~
52468 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
52469 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
52470 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
52471 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
52472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52484 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52488 The most widespread language package is
52493 \begin_inset Index idx
52496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52503 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
52505 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52506 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52507 come with the alternative
52513 \begin_inset Index idx
52516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52518 packages ! polyglossia
52523 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
52524 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
52530 The available selections are described in section
52531 \begin_inset space ~
52535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52537 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
52544 \begin_layout Description
52546 \begin_inset space ~
52550 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708374
52551 If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52552 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
52554 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708374
52558 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708377
52562 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708382
52564 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708384
52568 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708639
52569 that is used to switch to a different language
52570 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708410
52571 to start the package
52575 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708611
52576 This might be useful if you want to use a different command with
52580 (which provides several alternative commands with different behavior),
52581 or if you use a custom language package with specific commands, such as
52584 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52596 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708616
52604 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708621
52607 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
52609 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52613 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52631 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52632 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52639 is a placeholder that is substituted with the respective language name
52640 in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52645 \change_inserted -712698321 1563708571
52650 , this setting is ignored.
52655 \begin_layout Description
52657 \begin_inset space ~
52661 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857836
52668 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857869
52669 Use this if the language switch set in
52673 needs to be explicitly ended, as in
52677 's alternative command
52681 begin{otherlanguage*}\SpecialChar ldots
52682 \SpecialChar allowbreak
52685 end{otherlanguage*}
52689 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708866
52690 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
52691 command toggles the package on and off
52692 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858041
52693 Empty by default, as
52697 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52699 does not need to be explicitly ended (the switch remains valid until the
52704 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52710 \change_inserted -712698321 1563857868
52715 , this setting is ignored.
52720 \begin_layout Description
52722 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52724 \begin_inset space ~
52728 \begin_inset space ~
52731 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
52735 \begin_layout Description
52737 \change_deleted -712698321 1563708996
52739 \begin_inset space ~
52743 \begin_inset space ~
52746 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52752 \begin_layout Description
52754 \begin_inset space ~
52758 \begin_inset space ~
52762 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709051
52764 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709052
52767 this option is set, the languages used in the document will be added
52768 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709127
52771 to the document class options
52772 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709259
52773 rather than the language package options.
52774 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709186
52778 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709191
52779 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
52781 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709305
52782 Since the document class passes all options in gets to all loaded \SpecialChar LaTeX
52784 all language-aware packages will be informed about the used languages this
52789 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709264
52790 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
52799 \begin_layout Description
52801 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709314
52803 \begin_inset space ~
52807 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709328
52809 \begin_inset space ~
52813 \begin_inset space ~
52817 \begin_inset space ~
52823 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709331
52825 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709331
52828 this option is set,
52829 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709808
52830 the language switch defined in
52833 \begin_inset space ~
52838 is output at the beginning of the document, thereby explicitly switching
52839 to the document language.
52840 This assures that the correct language is used in any case.
52841 This might be needed if you use a non-default
52844 \begin_inset space ~
52849 or if a package resets the document language.
52850 If not set, the language that is active at document start is used (this
52851 usually should be the document language).
52852 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709548
52853 documents start with the chosen document language.
52854 When this option is not set, the
52857 \begin_inset space ~
52862 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52864 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
52867 \begin_inset space ~
52877 \begin_layout Description
52879 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709354
52881 \begin_inset space ~
52885 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709358
52887 \begin_inset space ~
52891 \begin_inset space ~
52895 \begin_inset space ~
52901 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709361
52905 \begin_inset space ~
52909 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709392
52910 Set document language explicitly
52916 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709618
52918 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709618
52924 \begin_inset space ~
52930 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709625
52932 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709626
52936 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709628
52938 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709628
52941 the end of the document.
52942 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709816
52946 \begin_layout Subsubsection
52947 \paragraph_spacing single
52949 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709833
52955 \begin_layout Description
52957 \begin_inset space ~
52961 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709847
52963 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709845
52967 \begin_inset space ~
52971 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709877
52973 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709877
52975 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709878
52979 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709882
52982 in a language different
52983 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709886
52985 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709886
52988 the document language will be
52989 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709907
52990 marked (by default with a blue
52993 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709911
52995 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709911
52999 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709927
53003 \begin_layout Description
53005 \change_inserted -712698321 1563711969
53007 \begin_inset space ~
53011 \begin_inset space ~
53015 \begin_inset space ~
53018 language If set, \SpecialChar LyX
53019 will switch the input language if the keyboard map is
53020 switched via the operating system.
53021 This is particularly useful if you switch between languages with different
53023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53026 g., English and Hebrew: in this case, switching the keyboard to Hebrew will
53027 automatically switch the input language to Hebrew as well, and vice versa).
53032 \begin_layout Description
53034 \change_deleted -712698321 1563709926
53036 \begin_inset space ~
53040 \begin_inset space ~
53043 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
53044 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
53049 \begin_layout Description
53051 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53053 \begin_inset space ~
53057 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710132
53059 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710132
53063 \begin_inset space ~
53067 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710265
53068 Here you can define how cursor movement (with the arrow keys) behaves
53069 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710266
53071 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710267
53075 \change_deleted -712698321 1563710171
53077 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710286
53078 scripts with right-to-left direction (e.g., Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi).
53080 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53081 , you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually
53082 to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
53084 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859701
53089 \begin_layout Standard
53094 means that the cursor
53095 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859940
53096 follows the logic of the text direction, and the arrows' direction relates
53097 to the directionality of the main paragraph language.
53099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53102 g., in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph (say, Hebrew
53103 embedded in English), the cursor starts at the right (that is, at the
53107 of the embedded passage in the right-to-left logic) when coming from the
53109 The meaning of the key is thus swapped for that part; right arrow in this
53110 specific case always means: move
53114 in text (even if this means:
53120 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53121 is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key
53122 \change_inserted -712698321 1563859705
53123 This setting might be useful in texts that mix left-to-right and right-to-left
53124 scripts, since the cursor then follows a coherent
53125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53136 \begin_layout Standard
53138 \change_inserted -712698321 1563860084
53143 means: always move to the direction towards which the arrows really point.
53144 In this case, in embedded right-to-left text in a left-to-right paragraph,
53145 the cursor starts at the left (in the text logic:
53149 ) when coming from the left.
53150 The visual meaning of the key is thus maintained in all cases, at the expense
53152 \change_deleted -712698321 1563857456
53153 and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
53154 \change_inserted -712698321 1563858627
53159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
53161 \change_inserted -712698321 1563710235
53165 \begin_layout Description
53167 \change_inserted -712698321 1563776004
53169 \begin_inset space ~
53173 \begin_inset space ~
53176 separator Defines the default decimal separator for use in tables (decimal
53177 separator alignment).
53178 By default, the appropriate character for the current language is selected
53180 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53183 g., dot for English, comma for German), but you can also specify a specific
53184 (static) custom character here.
53187 \begin_layout Description
53189 \change_inserted -712698321 1563709001
53191 \begin_inset space ~
53195 \begin_inset space ~
53198 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
53204 \begin_layout Subsection
53208 \begin_layout Standard
53209 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
53210 \begin_inset space ~
53214 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53216 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
53223 \begin_layout Section
53227 \begin_layout Subsection
53229 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53231 name "subsec:General-output"
53238 \begin_layout Description
53240 \begin_inset space ~
53243 search Commands that will be used for the menu
53245 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
53247 \begin_inset space ~
53253 For a detailed description see section
53255 Reverse DVI/PDF search
53260 \begin_inset space ~
53268 \begin_layout Description
53270 \begin_inset space ~
53273 Options Options for the program
53277 that is used for the export format
53282 \begin_inset space ~
53286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53288 reference "subsec:Export"
53293 Possible options are listed in the
53298 \begin_inset Newline newline
53302 \begin_inset Flex URL
53305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53307 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
53317 \begin_layout Description
53319 \begin_inset space ~
53323 \begin_inset space ~
53326 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
53329 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
53330 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
53332 \begin_inset space ~
53338 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
53341 \begin_layout Description
53343 \change_deleted -712698321 1534601711
53345 \begin_inset space ~
53349 \begin_inset Index idx
53352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53359 \begin_inset Index idx
53362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53363 Settings ! Date format
53368 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
53369 \begin_inset Newline newline
53373 \begin_inset Flex URL
53376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53378 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
53384 \begin_inset Newline newline
53387 For example the format
53388 \begin_inset Newline newline
53392 \begin_inset Newline newline
53395 prints the date as day/month/year.
53400 \begin_layout Description
53402 \begin_inset space ~
53406 \begin_inset space ~
53409 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
53410 is allowed to overwrite on export.
53413 \begin_layout Subsection
53419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53421 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
53426 \begin_inset Index idx
53429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53430 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
53439 \begin_layout Description
53441 \change_deleted -712698321 1524413534
53443 \begin_inset space ~
53451 \begin_inset space ~
53455 \begin_inset space ~
53458 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
53463 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
53484 are used for Cyrillic.
53485 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
53486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53494 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53498 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
53500 sets up in the background.
53501 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
53506 \begin_layout Description
53508 \begin_inset space ~
53512 \begin_inset space ~
53516 \begin_inset space ~
53520 \begin_inset space ~
53523 options They only have an effect when the program
53527 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
53530 \begin_layout Standard
53531 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
53532 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
53533 manuals of the applications.
53536 \begin_layout Description
53538 \begin_inset space ~
53541 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
53542 \begin_inset space ~
53546 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53548 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
53555 \begin_layout Description
53557 \begin_inset space ~
53560 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
53561 \begin_inset space ~
53565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53567 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
53574 \begin_layout Description
53576 \begin_inset space ~
53579 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
53580 \begin_inset space ~
53584 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53586 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
53593 \begin_layout Description
53599 \begin_inset space ~
53602 command Command for the program
53604 Check\SpecialChar TeX
53607 that is described in the section
53609 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
53614 Additional Features
53619 \begin_layout Standard
53620 There are additionally the following options:
53623 \begin_layout Description
53625 \begin_inset space ~
53629 \begin_inset space ~
53633 \begin_inset space ~
53637 \begin_inset space ~
53642 \begin_inset space ~
53645 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
53646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53663 to separate folders.
53664 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
53666 \begin_inset Index idx
53669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53676 \begin_inset Index idx
53679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53688 \begin_layout Description
53690 \begin_inset space ~
53694 \begin_inset space ~
53698 \begin_inset space ~
53702 \begin_inset space ~
53706 \begin_inset space ~
53710 \begin_inset space ~
53713 changes Removes all manually set
53719 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53720 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53722 \begin_inset space ~
53727 dialog when changing the document class.
53730 \begin_layout Section
53732 \begin_inset space ~
53736 \begin_inset Index idx
53739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53748 \begin_layout Subsection
53750 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53752 name "subsec:Converters"
53757 \begin_inset Index idx
53760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53769 \begin_layout Standard
53770 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
53771 from one format to another.
53772 You can modify converters or create new ones.
53773 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
53780 \begin_inset space ~
53785 field and press the
53790 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
53794 \begin_inset space ~
53799 drop-down list, modify the
53803 field and press the
53810 \begin_layout Standard
53813 Converter File Cache
53819 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
53821 Maximum Age (in days
53824 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
53825 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
53828 \begin_layout Standard
53829 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
53830 definition, is described in the section
53841 \begin_layout Subsection
53843 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53845 name "sec:File-Formats"
53850 \begin_inset Index idx
53853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53860 \begin_inset Index idx
53863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53872 \begin_layout Standard
53873 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
53883 programs that should be used for certain formats.
53886 \begin_layout Standard
53887 You can also define the
53889 Default output format
53891 that is used when you use
53893 View, Update, View Master Document
53897 Update Master Document
53903 menu or the toolbar.
53906 \begin_layout Standard
53907 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53918 \begin_layout Standard
53919 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53921 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
53922 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53923 This is done by specifying a
53928 More about this is described in the section
53939 \begin_layout Chapter
53940 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53942 \begin_inset Index idx
53945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53952 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53954 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53961 \begin_layout Standard
53963 \begin_inset space ~
53967 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53969 reference "tab:Units"
53973 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
53974 and used in this documentation.
53977 \begin_layout Standard
53978 \begin_inset Float table
53985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53986 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
54003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54004 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
54010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54012 \begin_inset Tabular
54013 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
54014 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
54015 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54016 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
54017 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
54019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54063 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54067 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54123 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54141 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54170 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
54174 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54306 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54331 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54335 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54354 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54368 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54372 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54405 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54409 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54441 scaled point (65536
54442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
54454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54509 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
54514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54633 % of original image width
54638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54722 \begin_layout Standard
54723 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54726 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
54733 \begin_layout Bibliography
54734 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54735 LatexCommand bibitem
54742 The \SpecialChar LyX
54744 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54747 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
54753 \begin_inset Newline newline
54757 \begin_inset Flex URL
54760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54762 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
54770 \begin_layout Bibliography
54771 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54772 LatexCommand bibitem
54773 key "latexcompanion"
54778 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
54780 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54781 Companion Second Edition.
54784 Addison-Wesley, 2004
54787 \begin_layout Bibliography
54788 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54789 LatexCommand bibitem
54795 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
54798 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54802 Addison-Wesley, 2003
54805 \begin_layout Bibliography
54806 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54807 LatexCommand bibitem
54816 : A Document Preparation System.
54819 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
54822 \begin_layout Bibliography
54823 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54824 LatexCommand bibitem
54834 The \SpecialChar TeX
54838 Addison-Wesley, 1984
54841 \begin_layout Bibliography
54842 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54843 LatexCommand bibitem
54849 The \SpecialChar TeX
54851 \begin_inset Newline newline
54855 \begin_inset Flex URL
54858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54860 https://ctan.org/topic
54868 \begin_layout Bibliography
54869 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54870 LatexCommand bibitem
54876 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54878 \begin_inset Newline newline
54882 \begin_inset Flex URL
54885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54887 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54895 \begin_layout Bibliography
54896 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54897 LatexCommand bibitem
54904 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54906 name "Documentation"
54907 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54914 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54918 \begin_inset Newline newline
54922 \begin_inset Flex URL
54925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54927 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54935 \begin_layout Bibliography
54936 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54937 LatexCommand bibitem
54944 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54946 name "Documentation"
54947 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54952 how to use the program
54954 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54958 \begin_inset Newline newline
54962 \begin_inset Flex URL
54965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54967 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54975 \begin_layout Bibliography
54976 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54977 LatexCommand bibitem
54984 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54986 name "Documentation"
54987 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54992 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
54998 \begin_inset Index idx
55001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55003 packages ! biblatex
55009 \begin_inset Newline newline
55013 \begin_inset Flex URL
55016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55018 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
55026 \begin_layout Bibliography
55027 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55028 LatexCommand bibitem
55035 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55037 name "Documentation"
55038 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
55043 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55049 \begin_inset Index idx
55052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55060 \begin_inset Newline newline
55064 \begin_inset Flex URL
55067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55069 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
55077 \begin_layout Bibliography
55078 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55079 LatexCommand bibitem
55086 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55088 name "Documentation"
55089 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
55099 \begin_inset Newline newline
55103 \begin_inset Flex URL
55106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55108 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
55116 \begin_layout Bibliography
55117 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55118 LatexCommand bibitem
55119 key "makeindex-man"
55125 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55128 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
55138 \begin_inset Newline newline
55142 \begin_inset Flex URL
55145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55147 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
55155 \begin_layout Bibliography
55156 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55157 LatexCommand bibitem
55164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55166 name "Documentation"
55167 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
55177 \begin_inset Newline newline
55181 \begin_inset Flex URL
55184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55186 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
55194 \begin_layout Bibliography
55195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55196 LatexCommand bibitem
55203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55205 name "Documentation"
55206 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
55211 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
55213 \begin_inset Newline newline
55217 \begin_inset Flex URL
55220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55222 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
55230 \begin_layout Bibliography
55231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55232 LatexCommand bibitem
55239 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55241 name "Documentation"
55242 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
55247 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55253 \begin_inset Index idx
55256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55264 \begin_inset Newline newline
55268 \begin_inset Flex URL
55271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55273 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
55281 \begin_layout Bibliography
55282 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55283 LatexCommand bibitem
55290 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55292 name "Documentation"
55293 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
55298 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55304 \begin_inset Index idx
55307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55309 packages ! enumitem
55315 \begin_inset Newline newline
55319 \begin_inset Flex URL
55322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55324 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
55332 \begin_layout Bibliography
55333 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55334 LatexCommand bibitem
55341 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55343 name "Documentation"
55344 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
55349 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55355 \begin_inset Index idx
55358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55360 packages ! fancyhdr
55366 \begin_inset Newline newline
55370 \begin_inset Flex URL
55373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55375 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
55383 \begin_layout Bibliography
55384 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55385 LatexCommand bibitem
55392 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55394 name "Documentation"
55395 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
55400 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55406 \begin_inset Index idx
55409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55411 packages ! hyperref
55417 \begin_inset Newline newline
55421 \begin_inset Flex URL
55424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55426 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
55434 \begin_layout Bibliography
55435 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55436 LatexCommand bibitem
55443 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55445 name "Documentation"
55446 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
55451 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55457 \begin_inset Index idx
55460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55462 packages ! microtype
55468 \begin_inset Newline newline
55472 \begin_inset Flex URL
55475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55477 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
55485 \begin_layout Bibliography
55486 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55487 LatexCommand bibitem
55494 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55496 name "Documentation"
55497 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
55502 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55508 \begin_inset Index idx
55511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55519 \begin_inset Newline newline
55523 \begin_inset Flex URL
55526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55528 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
55536 \begin_layout Bibliography
55537 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55538 LatexCommand bibitem
55545 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55547 name "Documentation"
55548 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
55553 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55559 \begin_inset Index idx
55562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55564 packages ! prettyref
55570 \begin_inset Newline newline
55574 \begin_inset Flex URL
55577 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55579 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
55587 \begin_layout Bibliography
55588 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55589 LatexCommand bibitem
55596 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55598 name "Documentation"
55599 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
55604 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
55610 \begin_inset Index idx
55613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55615 packages ! refstyle
55621 \begin_inset Newline newline
55625 \begin_inset Flex URL
55628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55630 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
55638 \begin_layout Bibliography
55639 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55640 LatexCommand bibitem
55647 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55650 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
55655 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55657 \begin_inset Newline newline
55661 \begin_inset Flex URL
55664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55666 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
55674 \begin_layout Bibliography
55675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55676 LatexCommand bibitem
55683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55686 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
55691 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55693 \begin_inset Newline newline
55697 \begin_inset Flex URL
55700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55702 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
55710 \begin_layout Bibliography
55711 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55712 LatexCommand bibitem
55719 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55722 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
55727 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55728 for Cyrillic languages:
55729 \begin_inset Newline newline
55733 \begin_inset Flex URL
55736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55738 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
55746 \begin_layout Bibliography
55747 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55748 LatexCommand bibitem
55755 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55758 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
55763 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55765 \begin_inset Newline newline
55769 \begin_inset Flex URL
55772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55774 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
55782 \begin_layout Bibliography
55783 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55784 LatexCommand bibitem
55791 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55794 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
55799 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55801 \begin_inset Newline newline
55805 \begin_inset Flex URL
55808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55810 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
55818 \begin_layout Bibliography
55819 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55820 LatexCommand bibitem
55827 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55830 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
55835 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
55837 \begin_inset Newline newline
55841 \begin_inset Flex URL
55844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55846 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
55854 \begin_layout Standard
55855 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55889 \begin_inset Note Note
55892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55899 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55900 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
55901 bibliography is the second one:
55909 \begin_layout Standard
55910 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55911 LatexCommand bibtex
55912 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
55913 options "biblio/alphadin"
55920 \begin_layout Standard
55921 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55925 \begin_layout Standard
55929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55935 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55944 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55952 \begin_inset Note Note
55955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55956 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink, see sec.
55957 \begin_inset space ~
55961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55963 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55975 \begin_layout Standard
55976 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55977 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55983 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55984 LatexCommand printindex